Home

Programmer Manual TDS200, TDS1000/TDS2000

1. NOTE Any change made when in Average mode aborts the acquisition and resets ACQuire NUMACgq to zero m TDS200 changing the vertical position does not reset the value m TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series if the Trigger mode is set to Auto and the Horizontal Scale is 10 ms div or slower changing the vertical position does not reset the value NOTE In Scan mode ACQuire NUMACq always returns zero Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire NUMACq Returns lt NR1 gt Examples ACQui re NUMACq Might return 350 indicating that 350 acquisitions took place since an ACQuire STATE RUN command was executed ACQuire NUMAVg 2 48 Sets the number of oscilloscope waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform This command is equivalent to setting the Averages option in the Acquire menu Group Acquisition TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax ACQuire NUMAVg lt NR1 gt ACQuire NUMAVg Arguments lt NR1 gt is the number of waveform acquisitions Correct values are 4 16 64 and 128 Examples ACQuire NUMAVg 16 This specifies that an averaged waveform will show the result of combining 16 separately acquired waveforms ACQuire NUMAVg Might return 64 indicating that there are 64 acquisitions specified for averaging ACQuire STATE Starts or stops oscilloscope acquisitions This command is the equivalent of p
2. Table 2 15 Math commands Table 2 16 Measurement commands Table 2 17 Miscellaneous commands Table 2 18 PictBridge commands TDS1000B and TDS2000B only 000 Table 2 19 Power and Battery Related commands TPS2000 only cc cee eee eee eee Table 2 20 Power Measurement commands TPS2000 with TPS2PWRI only Table 2 21 RS 232 commands 2 iv TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Table of Contents Table 2 22 Save and Recall commands 2 33 Table 2 23 Status and Error commands 2 33 Table 2 24 Trigger commands eeee00 2 35 Table 2 25 Vertical commands eeeeeee 2 36 Table 2 26 Waveform commands eeee00 2 38 Table 2 27 Binary data ranges eeeeeee 2 41 Table 2 28 Vertical position ranges using a 1X probe 2 68 Table 2 29 DATa and WFMPre parameter settings 2 88 Table 2 30 Commands that generate an Operation Complete message ccc cece cece ween eee 2 170 Table 2 31 Additional WFMPre commands 2 259 Table 3 1 SESR bit functions 0 000s 3 2 Table 3 2 SBR bit functions 0c cece eee 3 4 Table 3 3 No event messages c cee e eee eees 3 17 Table 3 4 Command error messages CME bit 5 3 18 Table 3 5 Execution error messages EXE bit 4
3. 3 18 Table 3 6 Device error messages DDE bit3 3 22 Table 3 7 System event messages ee0e00 3 22 Table 3 8 Execution warning messages EXE Bit 4 3 23 Table 3 9 Internal warning messages 3 24 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer v Table of Contents vi TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer OOOO Ae Preface This programmer manual provides information on how to remotely operate your TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B or TPS2000 series oscilloscope You can use communication ports and protocols such as for the RS 232 the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB or Universal Serial Bus USB standards to remotely control and operate your oscilloscope Related Documents Each series of oscilloscopes has a different set of documentation TPS2000 Series Manuals For general operation refer to the TPS2000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope User Manual a standard accessory Language TPS2000 series user manual part number English 071 1441 XX French 071 1442 XX Italian 071 1443 XX German 071 1444 XX Spanish 071 1445 XX Japanese 071 1446 XX Portuguese 071 1447 XX Simplified Chinese 071 1448 XX Traditional Chinese 071 1449 XX Korean 071 1450 XX Russian 071 1451 XX TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer vii Preface For information on the TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application refer to the TP
4. Header Description CURVe Transfer waveform data to or from the oscilloscope DATa Set or query the waveform data format and location DATa DESTination Set or query the destination for waveforms sent to the oscilloscope DATa ENCdg Set or query the waveform data encoding method DATa SOUrce Set or query the source of CURVe data DATa STARt Set or query the starting point in waveform transfer DATa STOP Set or query the ending point in waveform transfer DATa TARget Same as DATa DESTination DATa WIDth Set or query the byte width of waveform points WAVFrm Return waveform preamble and curve data WFMPre Return waveform preamble WFMPre BIT_Nr WFMPre BN_Fmt WFMPre BYT_Nr WFMPre BYT_Or WFMPre ENCdg Set or query the preamble bit width of waveform points Set or query the preamble binary encoding type Set or query the preamble byte width of waveform points Set or query the preamble byte order of waveform points Set or query the preamble encoding method TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 26 Waveform commands Cont Header WFMPre NR_Pt Description Query the number of points in the curve transfer WFMPre PT_Fmt Set or query the format of curve points WFMPre PT_Off Query the trigger offset WFMPre WFld Query the waveform identifier WFMPre XINcr Set or query the horizontal sampling interval WFMPre XUNit Set or query the horizo
5. m Calibration data that affects device specifications m Stored settings m Stored waveforms or data m Hard copy parameters m Display messages language selection m Current page of paged menus m SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT m FILESYSTEM CWD Examples Refer to Appendix B Factory Setup Related Commands PSC RCL RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp SAVe IMAge FILEFormat FILESystem CWD FILESystem Query Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 108 Returns the current working directory and amount of free space on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Group File system Syntax FILESystem Examples FILESystem Might return FILESYSTEM CWD A FREESPACE 29691904 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem CWD TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the current working folder path on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Group File system Syntax FILESystem CWD lt folder path gt FILESystem CWD Arguments lt folder path gt is a quoted string that defines the folder name and path The root folder is A If there is no CompactFlash card or USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope the query retur
6. CH lt x gt COUP1 ing Arguments AC sets the specified oscilloscope channel to AC coupling TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions DC sets the specified oscilloscope channel to DC coupling GND sets the specified oscilloscope channel to ground Only a flat ground level waveform is displayed Examples CH1 COUPTING AC This establishes AC coupling on channel 1 CH2 COUP1 ING Might return DC Indicating that channel 2 is set to DC coupling CH lt x gt CURRENTPRObe TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the scale factor of the specified channel for current probes The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments You can issue this command when CH lt x gt YUNit lt QString gt is set to V However this command only affects the readouts when CH lt x gt YUNit lt QString gt is set to A Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt CURRENTPRObe 0 2 1 2 5 10 50 100 1000 CH lt x gt CURRENTPRObe Arguments 0 2 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 0 2X attenuation 1 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1X attenuation 2 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 2X attenuation 5 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 5X attenuation TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 65 Command Descriptions 10 sets the specified oscilloscop
7. Header Description UNLock Unlock front panel local lockout VERBose Return full command name or minimum spellings with query AUTOSet ENABLE can be manually set from the Service Diag menu To access the service diagnostics menu refer to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B series service manual PictBridge Commands TDS1000B and TDS2000B Only The PictBridge commands let you control the format of the hard copy on the PictBridge compatible printer Table 2 13 lists and describes PictBridge commands NOTE The HARDCopy BUTTON HARDCopy INKSaver and HARDCopy LAYOUT commands apply to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Refer to page 2 20 for more information Table 2 18 PictBridge commands Header PICTBridge DEF PICTBridge PAPERSIZE PICTBridge IMAGESIZE PICTBridge PAPERTYPE PICTBridge PRINTQUAL PICTBridge DATEPRINT PICTBridge IDPRINT Description Set the next six options to default Set or query the paper size Set or query the image size Set or query the paper type Set or query the print quality Set or query the date print Set or query the ID print TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 27 Command Groups Power and Battery Related Commands TPS2000 Only Power and Battery Related commands provide battery management functions to a TPS2000 oscilloscope Table 2 19 lists and describes the Power and Battery Related commands Table 2 19 Power and Battery Related c
8. Might return ON if the printer is set to print the date and time PICTBridge IDPRINT TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only Sets the oscilloscope model and serial number to be printed on the hard copy if the feature is available on the compatible printer This command is equivalent to setting the ID Print option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup gt PRINT Button gt Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge IDPRINT DEFLT OFF ON PICTBridge IDPRINT Arguments DEFLT will match the default setting of the printer on or off ON prints the model and serial number on the hard copy TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 175 Command Descriptions OFF does not print the model and serial number Examples PICTBridge IDPRINT Might return ON if the printer is set to print the model and serial number POWer Query Only TPS2000 Series Only Returns the current POWer measurement settings Group Power and Battery Related Syntax POWer Examples POWER Might return the following POWER AC PRESENT 1 POWER BATTERY 1 GASGAUGE 0 STATUS NOTINSTALLED POWER BATTERY2 GASGAUGE 0 STATUS NOTINSTALLED POWER BATTERIES TIME 0 POWER BUTTONLIGHT 1 POWer AC PRESENt Query Only TPS2000 Series Only 2 176 Returns a statement indicating whether the oscilloscope is being powered by battery or AC Group Power and Battery Re
9. Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss AVErage TURNON Might return 1 698264356E 2 SWLoss ENABLe TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries the switching loss menu on or off Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss ENABLe ON OFF SWLoss ENABLe Arguments ON enables the switching loss menu OFF disables the switching loss menu Examples SWLoss ENABLe ON Sets the switching loss measurement to on TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 205 Command Descriptions SWLoss LEVELS Set Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the Switching Loss measurement levels to factory default values for the following commands SWLoss TONSTART SW Loss TONEND SWLoss TOFFSTART SWLoss TOFFEND Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss LEVELS DEFault Arguments DEFault sets Switching Loss measurement levels to default values Examples SWLoss LEVELS DEFault Returns Switching Loss measurement levels to default values SWLoss LOG CONDUCTION Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 206 Returns the Conduction Loss for the switching loss measurement specified by the SWLoss LOG INDEX command NOTE The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss LOG IN DEX command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss AVErage N This indicates that insufficient measurements have b
10. Returns lt QString gt in the following format lt Status gt lt Module name gt lt Status gt lt Module name gt Examples DIAg RESU1t LOG Might return pass CPU pass ACQ1 pass EXTENSION for power up diagnostics DiSplay Query Only Returns the current display settings Group Display Syntax DISplay Returns The current display settings Examples DISplay Might return DISPLAY FORMAT YT STYLE VECTORS PERSISTENCE OFF CONTRAST 50 INVERT OFF DiSplay BRIGHTness TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the brightness of the LCD display Group Display TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 97 Command Descriptions Syntax DISplay BRIGHTness 100 90 75 60 45 30 15 0 DISplay BRIGHTness Arguments Sets the display brightness in percent Examples DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS 75 Sets the display brightness to 75 Related Commands DISplay CONTRast DISplay INVert DiSplay CONTRast 2 98 Sets or queries the contrast of the LCD display This command is equivalent to setting the Contrast option in the Display menu Group Display Syntax DISplay CONTRast lt NR1 gt DISplay CONTRast Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer in the range from 1 through 100 The larger the value the greater the screen contrast Examples DISplay CONTRast 63 Sets the display contrast to 63 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descri
11. Abbreviating Commands You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands These abbrevia tions are shown in capital letters in the command listing in the Command Groups section on page 2 15 and Command Descriptions section on page 2 45 For example the command ACQuire NUMAvg can be entered simply as ACQ NUMA or acq numa If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part of query responses you can also control whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full length using the VERBose command Concatenating Commands You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a semicolon The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in the order received When concatenating commands and queries you must follow these rules Completely different headers must be separated by both a semicolon and by the beginning colon on all commands but the first For example the commands TRIGger MODe NORMal and ACQuire NUMAVg 16 can be concatenated into a single command TRIGger MODe NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 16 2 6 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Syntax m If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon For example the commands ACQuire MODe AVErage and ACQuire NUMAVg 16 could be concatenated into a single command ACQuire MODe AVErage NUMAVg 16 The longer version
12. Arguments Time in seconds Range is 33 ns to 10 s Resolution varies Value is forced to nearest achievable value Examples TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WIDth 000000123 followed by TRIGGER MAIN PULse WIDth WIDth Might return 1 155E 7 TRIGger MAIn TYPe Sets or queries the type of oscilloscope trigger This is equivalent to setting the Type option in the Trigger menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn TYPe EDGE VIDeo PULse TRIGger MAIn TYPe TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 233 Command Descriptions Arguments EDGE is a normal trigger A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a specified voltage level in the specified direction and is controlled by the TRIGger MAIn EDGE commands VIDeo specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified signal is found and is controlled by the TRIGger MAIn VIDeo commands PULse specifies that a trigger occurs when the specified signal meets the pulse width criteria that is controlled by the TRIGger MAIn PULse commands not available with TDS200 series oscilloscopes Examples TRIGger MAIn TYPe Might return VIDEO indicating that the main trigger type is a video trigger TRIGger MAIn ViDeo Query Only Returns the main video trigger settings Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn VIDeo Examples TRIGger MAIn VIDeo Might return TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO SOURCE CH1 SYNC FIELD PO Larity NORMAL 2 234 TDS200 TDS1000 20
13. Examples DATa WIDth 1 Sets the data width to 1 byte per data point for CURVe data TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions DATE Related Commands CURVe WFMPre BIT_Nr WFMPre BYT_Nr TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only DDT Sets or queries the oscilloscope date value The oscilloscope uses these values to time stamp files saved to the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or to the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only as well as show the time and date on the oscilloscope display Group Miscellaneous Syntax DATE lt QString gt DATE Arguments lt QString gt is a date in the form yyyy mm dd Examples DATE 2003 05 06 Sets the date to May 6th 2003 Related Commands TIMe Lets you specify a command or a list of commands to execute when the oscilloscope receives a TRG command or the GET GPIB interface message or the USBTMC TRIGGER message This is a special alias that TRG uses TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 93 Command Descriptions DESE 2 94 TRG command or the GET GPIB interface message or the USBTMC TRIGGER message Group Miscellaneous Syntax DDT lt Block gt lt QString gt DDT Arguments lt Block gt or lt QString gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages must contain only valid commands that must be separated by semico
14. Sets or queries the oscilloscope time value The oscilloscope uses the time and date values to time stamp files saved to the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or to the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only as well as show the time and date on the oscilloscope display Group Miscellaneous Syntax DATE lt QString gt DATE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments lt QString gt is atime in the form hh mm ss based on a 24 hour clock 00 00 00 through 23 59 59 Examples TIMe 14 45 00 Sets the time to 2 45 pm Related Commands DATE TRG Set Only Trigger Executes commands that are defined by DDT Group Miscellaneous Syntax TRG Examples TRG Immediately executes all commands defined by DDT Related Commands DDT TRIGger Forces a trigger event to occur When used as a query TRIGger returns the current trigger settings Group Trigger TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 221 Command Descriptions Syntax TRIGger FORCe TRIGger Arguments FORCe creates a trigger event If TRIGger STATE is REAdy the acquisition will complete otherwise this command will be ignored This is equivalent to selecting FORCE TRIG on the front panel Examples TRIGger FORCe Forces a trigger event to occur TRIGger Might return the following string TRIGGER MAIN MODE AUTO TYPE
15. DATa STOP Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer value that ranges from 1 to 2500 and specifies the last data point that will be transferred When DATa STOP is less than DATa STARt the values are swapped internally for CURVe If you always want to transfer complete waveforms set DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to 2500 Examples DATa STOP 150 Specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 150 DATa STOP Might return 285 as the last data point that will be transferred TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 91 Command Descriptions Related Commands CURVe DATa TARget Sets or queries the location for storing waveform data transferred from an external device to the oscilloscope when executing the CURVe command This command is equivalent to the DATa DES Tination command and is included here for compatibility with older Tektronix oscilloscopes DATa WIDth 2 92 Sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to be transferred when executing the CURVe command Changing DATa WIDth may change the following WFMPre parameters BIT_Nr BYT_Nr YMULt YOFf and YZEro Group Waveform Syntax DATa WIDth lt NR1 gt DATa WIDth Arguments lt NR1 gt 1 sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to 1 byte 8 bits lt NR1 gt 2 sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to 2 bytes 16 bits If DATa WIDth is set to 2 the least significant byte is always zero
16. Examples SWLoss TOFFEND Might return 10 indicating that Switching Loss Turn off End is set to 10 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 213 Command Descriptions Related Commands SWLoss TOFFSTART SWLoss TONSTART SW Loss TONEND SWLoss LEVELS SWLoss TONEND TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 214 Sets or queries a level on the first falling edge of the voltage waveform The Turn On loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math waveform between the turn on start SWLoss TONSTART and turn on end SWLoss TONEND points Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss TONEND lt NR1 gt SWLoss TONEND Arguments lt NR1 gt in percent Default value is 10 Examples SWLoss TONEND Might return 10 indicating that Switching Loss Turn off Start is set to 10 Related Commands SWLoss TONSTART SWLoss TOFFSTART SWLoss TOFFEND SWLoss LEVELS TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SWLoss TOFFSTART TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries a level on the rising edge of the voltage waveform The Turn Off loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math waveform between the turn off start SWLoss TOFFSTART and turn off end SWLoss TOFFEND points Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss TOFFSTART lt NR1 gt SWLoss TOFFSTART Arguments lt NR1 gt in percent Defau
17. MEASUrement IMMed TYPe FREQuency MEAN PERIod PHAse PK2pk CRMs MINImum MAXImum RISe FALL PWIdth NWIdth TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions TPS2000 with a TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only WFCREST WFFREQ WFCYCRMS TRUEPOWER VAR POWERFACTOR PFPHASE PHAse MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Arguments FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform PERIod is the duration in seconds of the first complete cycle in the waveform PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage of the first complete cycle in the waveform MINImum TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the value of the smallest point in the waveform MAXImum TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the value of the largest point in the waveform RISe TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the rise time between 10 and 90 of the first rising edge of the waveform Rising edge must be displayed to measure The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10 and 90 measure ment points FALL TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the fall time
18. Saveref error Source reference data invalid Calibration error Cursor error Off screen Cursor error Cursors are off Cursor error Cursor source waveform is off TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 21 Status and Events 3 22 Table 3 6 lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope operation These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair Table 3 6 Device error messages DDE bit 3 Code Message 300 Device specific error 310 System error 311 Memory error 313 Calibration memory lost 314 Save recall memory lost 315 Configuration memory lost 350 Queue overflow does not set DDE bit 361 Parity error in program message check parity 362 Framing error in program message check baud rate 363 Input buffer overrun check flagging Table 3 7 lists the system event messages These messages are generated whenever certain system conditions occur Table 3 7 System event messages Code Message 400 Query event 401 Power on PON bit 7 set 402 Operation complete OPC bit 0 set 403 User request URQ bit 6 set 404 Power fail DDE bit 3 set 405 Request control TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events Table 3 7 System event messages Cont Code 410 Message Query INTERRUPTED QYE bit 2 set 420 Query UNTERMINATED QYE bit 2 set 430 440 Query DEADLOCKED QYE bit 2 set Query UNTE
19. WFMPre XOFf lt NR3 gt Horizontal X axis offset WFMPre ZMUIt lt NR3 gt Z axis scale factor WFMPre ZOFf lt NR3 gt Z axis offset TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 259 Command Descriptions Table 2 31 Additional WFMPre commands Cont Command Argument Description WFMPre ZUNit lt QString gt Z axis units WFMPre ZZEro lt NR3 gt Z axis origin offset WFMPre lt wfm gt Query Only Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by lt wim gt if that waveform is active or displayed If that waveform is not active or displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates event message 420 Query unterminated and 2244 waveform requested is not active Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre lt wfm gt Refer to Waveform Mnemonics on page 2 10 for more information Returns Returns the response in the following format WFMPre lt wfm gt WFID lt Qstring gt PT FMT ENV Y XINcr lt NR3 gt PT_ Off lt NR1 gt XZEro lt NR3 gt XUNit lt QString gt YMU1t lt NR3 gt YZEro lt NR3 gt YOFF lt NR3 gt YUNit lt QString gt NR_Pt lt NR1 gt WFMPre lt wfm gt NR_Pt Query Only NOTE This query is not available when using a TDS210 or TDS220 oscilloscope firmware below V 2 00 with a TDS2CMA communica tions module 2 260 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Returns the number of points tha
20. 2 137 2 139 HORIZONTAL DELAY SCALE 2 136 HORIZONTAL DELAY SECDIV 2 137 HORIZONTAL MAIN 2 137 HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 138 HORIZONTAL MAIN SECDIV 2 139 HORIZONTAL RECORD LENGTH 2 140 HORIZONTAL SCALE 2 140 HORIZONTAL SECDIV 2 140 HORIZONTAL TRIGGER POSI TION 2 141 ID 2 141 IDN 2 143 TEEE Std 488 2 1987 2 2 2 25 2 33 L LANGUAGE 2 145 LOCK 2 145 LRN 2 146 Manual trigger simulation with command 2 221 Manuals vii Math command group 2 22 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer _ Index 5 Index Math commands MATH 2 146 MATH DEFINE 2 147 MATH FFT HORIZON TAL POSITION 2 150 MATH FFT HORIZON TAL SCALE 2 151 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSI TION 2 152 MATH FFT VERTICAL SCALE 2 153 MATH VERTICAL 2 150 2 154 MATH VERTICAL POSITION 2 154 MATH VERTICAL SCALE 2 155 MATH 2 146 MATH DEFINE 2 147 MATH FFT HORIZONTAL POSI TION 2 150 MATH FFT HORIZON TAL SCALE 2 151 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSI TION 2 152 MATH FFT VERTICAL SCALE 2 153 MATH VERTICAL 2 150 2 154 MATH VERTICAL POSITION 2 154 MATH VERTICAL SCALE 2 155 MEAS lt x gt command mnemonic 2 10 Measurement command group 2 23 Measurement commands MEASUREMENT 2 155 MEASUREMENT IMMED 2 156 MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 2 157 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE 2 158 MEASUREMENT IMMED UNITS 2 161 MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 2 162 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt 2 163 MEASURE
21. 2 36 Vertical commands CH lt x gt 2 62 CH lt x gt BANDWIDTH 2 63 CH lt x gt COUPLING 2 64 CH lt x gt CURRENTPROBE 2 65 CH lt x gt INVERT 2 66 CH lt x gt POSITION 2 67 CH lt x gt PROBE 2 68 CH lt x gt SCALE 2 69 CH lt x gt VOLTS 2 70 CH lt x gt YUNIT 2 71 SELECT 2 196 SELECT lt wfm gt 2 197 W WAT 2 242 3 11 Wait for operation complete 2 242 Waveform command mnemonic 2 10 Waveform command group 2 37 Waveform commands CURVE 2 84 DATA 2 85 DATA DESTINATION 2 86 DATA ENCDG 2 87 DATA SOURCE 2 89 DATA START 2 90 DATA STOP 2 91 DATA TARGET 2 92 DATA WIDTH 2 92 WAVEFORMANALY SIS SOURCE 2 242 WAVFRM 2 243 WFMPRE 2 244 WFMPRE lt wfm gt 2 260 2 263 WFMPRE lt wfm gt NR_PT 2 261 WFMPRE lt wfm gt PT_FMT 2 261 WFMPRE lt wfm gt PT_OFF 2 261 2 262 WFMPRE lt wfm gt WFLD 2 262 WFMPRE lt wfm gt XINCR 2 262 WFMPRE lt wfm gt XUNIT 2 262 WFMPRE lt wfm gt XZERO 2 262 WFMPRE lt wfm gt Y MULT 2 262 WFMPRE lt wfm gt YOFF 2 263 WFMPRE lt wfm gt Y ZERO 2 263 WFMPRE BIT_NR 2 244 WFMPRE BN_FMT 2 245 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index 13 Index WFMPRE BYT_NR 2 246 WFMPRE BYT_OR 2 247 WFMPRE ENCDG 2 247 WEMPRE NR_PT 2 248 WFMPRE PT_FMT 2 249 WFMPRE PT_OFF 2 251 WFMPRE WFID 2 251 WFEMPRE XINCR 2 252 WEMPRE XMULT 2 259 WFMPRE XOFF 2 259 WFMPRE XUNIT 2 253 WFMPRE XZERO 2 254 WFEMPRE YMULT 2 2
22. CH lt x gt BANdwidth ON l OFF CH lt x gt BANdwidth Arguments ON sets the channel bandwidth to 20 MHz OFF sets the channel bandwidth to the full bandwidth of the oscilloscope In most acquisition modes full bandwidth is 60 MHz 100 MHz or 200 MHz depending on the oscilloscope model There are exceptions TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 63 Command Descriptions TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series At vertical scales from 2 00 to 4 99 mV div sensitivity at the BNC that is after the probe factor is removed the full bandwidth is 20 MHz TDS200 Series At vertical scales of 5 mV div or less sensitivity at the BNC that is after the probe factor is removed the full bandwidth is 20 MHz When the acquisition mode is Peak Detect and the vertical scale at the BNC is 10 mV div or less the full bandwidth is also 20 MHz Examples CH2 BANDWIDth ON Sets the bandwidth of channel 2 to 20 MHz CH1 BANDWIDth Might return OFF This indicates there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 1 CH lt x gt COUPling 2 64 Sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting of the specified oscilloscope channel The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments This command is equivalent to setting the Coupling option in the Vertical menu Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt COUPling AC DC GND
23. Command Error Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query Command error messages are listed in Table 3 4 on page 3 18 EXE Execution Error Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was executing a command or query Execution error messages are listed in Table 3 5 on page 3 18 DDE Device Error Shows that a device error occurred Device error messages are listed in Table 3 6 on page 3 22 QYE Query Error Shows that either an attempt was made to read the Output Queue when no data was present or pending or that data in the Output Queue was lost 3 2 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events Table 3 1 SESR bit functions Cont Bit Function 1 RQC Request Control Not used 0 LSB OPC Operation Complete Shows that the operation is complete This bit is set when all pending operations complete following a OPC command See Table 2 30 on page 2 170 for a list of commands that generate an Operation Complete message The Status Byte Register SBR The SBR shown in Figure 3 2 records whether output is available in the Output Queue whether the oscilloscope requests service and whether the SESR has recorded any events Use a Serial Poll GPIB and USB only or STB to read the contents of the SBR The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Ou
24. Group Math Syntax MATH VERtical Examples MATH VERtical Might return MATH VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 5 0E 1 indicating the math waveform position and scale MATH VERtical POSition TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 154 Sets or returns the math waveform display position Group Math Syntax MATH VERtical POSition lt NR3 gt MATH VERtical POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the math vertical position in divisions from center screen TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Examples MATH VERtical POSITION Might return 3 0E0 indicating that the math waveform is 3 divisions below center screen MATH VERtical SCAle TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or returns the math waveform display scale in units per division It is not possible to use this command to set the math scale to a fine scale not achievable from the front panel This command typically rounds down to an achievable value If the value input is below the minimum value then the command will round up Group Math Syntax MATH VERtical SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH VERtical SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the math vertical scale in units per division Examples MATH VERTICAL SCALE 5 0e0 Sets the math vertical scale to five math waveform units per division MEASUrement Query Only Returns the current MEASUrement settings Group Measureme
25. TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only When used with the FACTORY argument this command is equivalent to pushing the DEFAULT SETUP front panel button TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Save and Recall Syntax RECAI1 SETUp FACtory lt NR1 gt lt file path gt Arguments FACtory selects the factory setup lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 1 to 5 TDS200 series or from 1 to 10 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series and specifies a setup storage location lt file path gt TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is a quoted string that defines the location and name of the setup file to recall from the CompactFlash card or the USB flash drive If you do not specify a path to the folder the TDS2MEM looks for the file in the current working folder The current folder refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query Examples RECA11 SETUp FACtory Recalls the oscilloscope setup to its factory defaults RECA11 SETUp A TSTSETUP PRTSTO1 SET Recalls the oscilloscope settings from the file PRTSTO1 SET file on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Related Commands FACtory RCL RST SAV SAVe SETUp RECAII WAVEForm Set Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2
26. TPS2000 Programmer 2 223 Command Descriptions Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn EDGE COUPling AC DC HFRej LFRej NOISErej TRIGger MAIn EDGE COUP1 ing Arguments AC selects AC trigger coupling DC selects DC coupling HFRej coupling removes the high frequency components of the DC signal LFRej coupling removes the low frequency components of the AC signal NOTSErej selects DC low sensitivity It requires added signal amplitude for more stable less false triggering Examples TRIGger MAIn EDGE COUPling DC Sets the main edge trigger coupling to DC TRIGger MAIn EDGE SLOpe 2 224 Selects a rising or falling slope for the edge trigger This is equivalent to setting the Slope option in the Trigger menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn EDGE SLOpe FALL RISe TRIGger MAIn EDGE SLOpe TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal Examples TRIGger MAIn EDGE SLOpe RISE Sets the main edge trigger to occur on the rising slope TRIGger MAIn EDGE SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the edge trigger This is equivalent to setting the Source option in the Trigger menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt EXT EXT5 EXT10 AC LINE TRIGger MAIn EDGE SOUr
27. the end of message terminator is either an EOI or the ASCII code for line feed LF For RS 232 the end of message terminator is the ASCII code for line feed LF For USB the end of message terminator is the EOM bit in a USBTMC message GPIB Address When communicating with a TDS1000B or TDS2000B series oscilloscope using a TEK USB 488 adapter you can set a unique GPIB address for the oscilloscope in the UTILITY gt Options gt GPIB Setup option TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Glossary 1 Glossary IEEE Acronym for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers RS 232 A serial full duplex asynchronous communication port that follows ANSI EIA TIA 562 1989 1 ANSI EIA TIA 574 1990 2 and CCITT V 24 1989 3 standards Serial Poll A device such as an oscilloscope on the GPIB bus can request service from the GPIB Controller by asserting the GPIB SRQ line a Hardware line that is only present on the GPIB communications bus A device on the USB bus can request service from the host by sending an SRQ packet on the Interrupt IN endpoint When a controller or a USB host acknowledges the SRQ it serial polls each open device on the bus to determine which device on the bus requested service Any device requesting service returns a status byte with bit 6 set and then unasserts the SRQ line GPIB only Devices not requiring service return a status byte with bit 6 cleared USB An acronym
28. the main trigger level in volts Examples TRIGger MAIn LEVel Might return 1 4 indicating that the main edge trigger is set to 1 4 V TRIGger MAIn MODe Sets or queries the trigger mode for the Edge all models and Pulse width TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only trigger types 2 228 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn MODe AUTO NORMal TRIGger MAIn MODe Arguments AUTO generates a trigger if a trigger is not detected within a specific time period AUTO also enables scan mode for sweep speeds of 100 ms div and slower NORMal waits for a valid trigger event Examples TRIGger MAIn MODe AUTO Specifies that a trigger event is automatically generated Related Commands ACQuire STOPAfter TRIGger MAIn PULse Query Only TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Returns the current Pulse Trigger settings Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn PULse TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 229 Command Descriptions Examples TRIGger MAIn PULse Might return the following string TRIGGER MAIN PULSE SOURCE CH1 WIDTH POLARITY POS ITIVE WHEN EQUAL WIDTH 1 0E 3 TRIGger MAIn PULse SOUrce TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 230 Sets or queries the source for the pulse trigger This is equivalent to setting
29. 201 Invalid while in local 210 Trigger error TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution error messages EXE bit 4 Cont Code Message 211 Trigger ignored 212 Arm ignored 220 Parameter error 221 Settings conflict 222 Data out of range 223 Too much data 224 Illegal parameter value 230 Data corrupt or stale 240 Hardware error 241 Hardware missing 242 Hardware configuration error 243 Hardware I O device error 250 Mass storage error 251 Missing mass storage 252 Missing media 253 Corrupt media 254 Media full 255 Directory full 256 File name not found 257 File name error 258 Media protected 260 Expression error 261 Math error in expression 2200 Measurement error Measurement system error TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 19 Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution error messages EXE bit 4 Cont Code Message 2201 Measurement error Zero period 2202 Measurement error No period found 2203 Measurement error No period second waveform 2204 Measurement error Low signal amplitude 2205 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2206 Measurement error Invalid gate 2207 Measurement error Measurement overflow 2208 Measurement error Waveform does not cross Mid Ref 2209 Measurement error No second Mid Ref crossing 2210 Measurement error No Mid Ref crossing second
30. BMP Moves the file VID EVAL BMP to the folder A PROD TST See page 2 20 for file and folder name rules TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem RMDir FILESystem RMDir Set Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Deletes a folder at the specified location on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Group File system Syntax FILESystem RMDir lt folder path gt Arguments lt folder path gt is a quoted string that defines the location and name of the folder to delete If you do not specify a path to the folder the oscilloscope deletes the specified folder in the current working folder The current folder refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query NOTE A folder must be empty before you can delete it Examples FILESystem RMDir A PROD TST 2ND RUN Deletes the folder 2ND RUN in the folder A PROD TST FILESystem RMDir VID EVAL Deletes the folder VID EVAL in the current working folder Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 115 Command Descriptions HARDCopy 2 116 Sends a copy of the screen display followed by an EOI to the port specified by HARDCopy PORT The format and layout of the output is specified with t
31. CH1CH2 CH3CH4 SWLoss SOURCES Arguments CH1CH2 specifies Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the input sources CH3CH4 specifies Channel 3 and Channel 4 as the input sources NOTE The CH3CH4 argument is only valid for instruments with four channels Examples SWLoss SOURCES Might return CH1CH2 Related Commands CH lt x gt YUNit SWLoss STOPAfter TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 212 Sets or queries the number of measurements used for Switching Loss measurement Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss STOPafter lt NR1 gt SWLoss STOPafter TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments lt NR1 gt defines the number of measurements you want to include Examples SWLoss STOPafter Might return 15 indicating that the oscilloscope will take fifteen measurements and stop Related Commands SWLoss ACQuire SWLoss TOFFEND TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries a level on the first falling edge of the current waveform that occurs after the turn off start point SWLoss TOFF START The Turn Off loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math waveform between the turn off start SWLoss TOFFSTART and turn off end SWLoss TOFFEND points Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss TOFFEND lt NR1 gt SWLoss TOFFEND Arguments lt NR1 gt in percent Default value is 10
32. CURSor HBArs UNIts Query Only 2 76 Returns the vertical scale units for the selected cursor source waveform Group Cursor Syntax CURSor HBArs UNIts Returns VOLts indicates volts from ground as the unit of measure DIVs indicates divisions as the unit of measure with center of screen as 0 divisions and bottom of screen as 4 divisions DECIBELS indicates decibels as the unit of measure relative to a 1 Vims Sine wave FFT only UNKNOWN indicates that Trigger View is active This also generates event message 221 Settings conflict AMPS indicates amps as the unit of measure TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions VOLTSSQUARED indicates volts squared V V as the unit of measure TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only AMPSSQUARED indicates amps squared A A as the unit of measure TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only VOLTSAMPS indicates voltage times current V A as the unit of measure TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only NOTE Unknown units are represented by in the oscilloscope readouts Examples CURSor HBArs UNIts Might return CURSOR HBARS UNITS VOLTS CURSor SELect SOUrce Sets or queries the waveform that is the source of the vertical and horizontal scale factors used in determining cursor values This command is equivalent to setting the Source option in the Curs
33. DATa STARt is set to 1 data points will be stored starting with the first point in the record and when DATa STARt is set to 500 data will be stored starting at the 500 point in the record The oscilloscope ignores DATa STOP when reading in data as the oscilloscope will stop reading data when there is no more data to read or when it has reached 2500 data points You must specify the first and last data points in the waveform record when transferring data from the oscilloscope to an external device Setting DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to 2500 always sends the entire waveform regardless of the acquisition mode Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation The DATa SOUrce command specifies the location of the data when transferring waveforms from the oscilloscope You can transfer one waveform at a time You can transfer only one waveform into the oscilloscope at a time Each waveform is stored in one of two stored waveform locations for 2 channel models or one of four stored waveform locations for 4 channel models You specify the stored waveform location with the DATa DESTination command TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups NOTE The oscilloscope stores waveforms that are lt 2500 data points long The oscilloscope truncates waveforms longer than 2500 data points Waveform Preamble Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that contains information such
34. EDGE LEVEL 0 0E0 HOLD OFF VALUE 5 0E 7 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO SOURCE CH1 SYNC FIELD POLARITY NORMAL TRIGger MAIn 2 222 Sets the oscilloscope trigger level to 50 of the minimum and maximum values of the signal Returns the current main trigger settings when used as a query Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn SETLevel TRIGger MAIn TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments SETLevel sets the main trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX amplitudes of the trigger source input This is equivalent to pressing the front panel SET LEVEL TO 50 button If the oscilloscope acquisition state is STOP and you send TRIGger MAIn SETLevel the oscilloscope ignores the command and generates event 221 Settings conflict Examples TRIGger MAIn SETLEVel Sets the main trigger level mid way between MAX and MIN TRIGger MAIn EDGE Query Only Returns the trigger coupling source and slope settings for the edge trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn EDGE Returns Trigger coupling source and slope settings for the main edge trigger Examples TRIGger MAIn EDGE Might return SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGger MAIn EDGE COUPling Sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger This is equivalent to setting the Coupling option in the Trigger menu TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B
35. NTSC standard for the video trigger TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 237 Command Descriptions TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SYNC Sets or queries the type for the video trigger sync This is equivalent to selecting the Sync option in the Trigger Video menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SYNC FIELD LINE ODD EVEN LINENum TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SYNC Arguments FIELD specifies that triggering occur on the vertical sync pulse LINE specifies that triggering occur on the horizontal sync pulse ODD TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only specifies triggering on odd fields EVEN TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only specifies triggering on even fields LINENum TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a specific line number which is specified through TRIGger MAIn VID eo LINE Examples TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SYNC FIELD Selects the vertical synchronization pulse for the video trigger sync 2 238 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions TRIGger STATE Query Only Returns the current state of the triggering system NOTE Accurate real time reporting of the trigger state within any single waveform acquisition is limited by several factors including horizontal sweep speed and communications and task latencies To check for the comp
36. Programmer Command Descriptions CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Positions a vertical bar cursor The unit is specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command and can be in units of seconds or frequency Hertz If the cursor source is an FFT math waveform CURSor VBArs POSITION is always in Hertz regardless of the value set by CURSor VBArs UNIts NOTE If Trigger View is active the query form returns 9 9E37 and generates event 221 Settings conflict Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Arguments lt x gt specifies which cursor to position Correct values are 1 and 2 lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command The position is relative to the trigger except when the cursor source is a math FFT waveform The cursor position is limited to the graticule whenever an attempt is made to move it outside the graticule Examples CURSor VBArs POSITION2 9 00E 6 Positions the second vertical bar cursor at 9 us CURSor VBArs POSITION1 Might return 1 00E 6 indicating the first vertical bar cursor is at 1 us TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 81 Command Descriptions CURSor VBArs SLOPE Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the change in amplitude divided by the change in time as measured between the two cursors The units are de
37. QString gt lt Comma gt lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt QString gt lt Message gt lt Command gt lt Command gt is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope As much of the command is returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the lt Message gt and lt Command gt strings combined The command string is right justified Examples ALLEv Might return the following string ALLEV 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 420 Query UNTERMINATED Related Commands CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg EVQty SRE STB AUTORange TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 52 Returns current AUTORange settings Group Power Measurement Syntax AUTORange Examples AUTORange TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Might return AUTORANGE SETTINGS BOTH STATE 1 indicating that Autorange is active and adjusting both the horizontal and vertical settings AUTORange STATE TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Toggles Autorange off and on Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTORange STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt AUTORange STATE Arguments OFF deactivates the Autorange feature ON activates the Autorange feature lt NR1 gt 0 deactivates the Autorange feature lt NR1 gt 0 activates the Autorange feature Examp
38. Queue Refer to Event Handling Sequence on page 3 8 for for more information Group Status and Error Syntax EVENT Returns lt NR1 gt Examples EVENT Might return EVENT 110 indicating there was an error in a command header Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVMsg SRE STB EVMsg Query Only Removes from the Event Queue a single event code associated with the results of the last ESR read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message Refer to Event Handling Sequence on page 3 8 for for more information Group Status and Error Syntax EVMsg TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 105 Command Descriptions Returns The event code and message in the following format lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt QString gt lt Message gt lt Command gt where lt Command gt is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope As much of the command as possible is returned without exceeding the 60 character limit of the lt Message gt and lt Command gt strings combined The command string is right justified Examples EVMsg Might return the message EVMSG 110 Command header error Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT SRE STB EVQty Query Only 2 106 Returns the number of event cod
39. SWLoss ENABLe SWLoss LEVELS SWLoss LOG CONDUCTION SWLoss LOG INDEX SWLoss LOG TOTAL SWLoss LOG TURNOFF SWLoss LOG TURNON SWLoss SAVE SWLoss SOURCES SWLoss STOPAfter Return the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning from off to on Set or query switching loss measurements on or off Return oscilloscope Switching Loss Measurement settings to factory default SWLoss TONSTART SWLoss TONEND SWLoss TOFFSTART SWLoss TOFFEND only Return the Conduction Loss for a switching loss measurement Set or query which measurement to return for a SWLoss LOG command Return the Total Loss for a switching loss measure ment Return the Turn Off Loss for a switching loss measurement Return the Turn On Loss for a switching loss measurement Saves the Switching Loss Measurements Set or query the input sources for Switching Loss Measurements Set or query the number of acquisitions used for Switching Loss Measurements 2 30 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 20 Power Measurement commands TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 only Cont Header Description SWLoss TOFFEND Set or query a level on the first falling edge of the current waveform that occurs after the turn off starts SWLoss TONEND Set or query a level on the first rising edge of the voltage waveform that occurs after the first falling edge SWLoss TOFFSTART Set or query a level
40. TRUEPOWER TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the true power measurement in Watts Source 1 must be volts source 2 must be Amperes VAR TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the reactive power measurement Source 1 must be volts source 2 must be Amperes POWERFACTOR TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the true power factor ratio measurement Source 1 must be volts source 2 must be Amperes PFPHASE TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the phase angle measurement in degrees Source 1 must be volts source 2 must be Amperes TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions PHAse TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the measurement of phase between source 1 and source 2 in degrees Examples MEASUrement IMMed TYPe FREQuency Defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Query Only Returns the units for the immediate oscilloscope measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Returns lt QString gt returns V for volts s for seconds or Hz for Hertz For the TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series lt QString gt can also return the following A for amps VA for volt amps AA for amps amps VV for volts volts You can also use this command for undefined math waveforms Examples MEASUremen
41. V2 00 with a TDS2CMA communications module CH1 CH2 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 TDS210 and TDS220 models firmware below V2 00 with a TDS2MM measurement module CH1 CH2 to subtract invert one of the waveforms through CH lt x gt INVert and then add FFT CH lt x gt lt window gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions TDS210 and TDS220 models firmware V2 00 and above with a TDS2CMA communications module CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH1 TDS224 model with a TDS2CMA communications module CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH1 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH3 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 4 channel models CH1 CH2 CH2 CH1 CH3 CH4 4 channel models CH4 CH3 4 channel models CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 4 channel models FFT CH lt x gt lt window gt For FFT the optional lt window gt argument is HANning FLATtop or RECTangular Examples MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 Sets the math waveform so that it displays the sum of channel 1 and channel 2 MATH DEFINE FFT CH1 HANNING Sets the math waveform to display an FFT of channel 1 using a Hanning window TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 149 Command Descriptions NOTE You can use this example with a TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series oscilloscope as well as a TDS200 series oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module MATH FFT
42. alphabetically The oscilloscope GPIB USB and RS 232 interfaces conform to Tektronix standard codes and formats except where noted The GPIB interface also conforms to IEEE Std 488 2 1987 except where noted The USB interface also conforms to USB Test and Measurement Class Subclass USB488 Specification except where noted Acquisition Commands Acquisition commands affect the acquisition of waveforms These commands control mode averaging and single waveform acquisition Table 2 8 lists and describes Acquisition commands Table 2 8 Acquisition commands Header Description ACQuire Return acquisition parameters ACQuire MODe Set or query the acquisition mode ACQuire NUMACq Return the of acquisitions obtained ACQuire NUMAVg Set or query the number of acquisitions for average ACQuire STATE Start or stop the acquisition system ACQuire STOPAfter Set or query the acquisition control TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 15 Command Groups Calibration and Diagnostic Commands Calibration and Diagnostic commands let you initiate the oscillo scope self calibration routines and examine the results of diagnostic tests Table 2 9 lists and describes Calibration and Diagnostic commands Table 2 9 Calibration and Diagnostic commands Header Description CAL Perform an internal self calibration and return result status CALibrate ABOrt Stop an in progress factory calibration CALibrate CONT
43. commands HORizontal MAIn POSition and HORizontal POSi tion are equivalent so HORizontal MAIn POSition is the value that is returned Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal Returns Returns all horizontal settings Examples HORizontal Might return the following string HORIZONTAL VIEW MAIN RECORDLENGTH 2500 MAIN POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 5 0E 4 HORIZONTAL DELAY POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 2 5E 4 HORizontal DELay Query Only 2 134 Returns all settings for the window time base The commands HORizontal DELay SECdiv and HORizontal DELay SCAle are equivalent so only the values for HORizontal DELay SCAle are returned Group Horizontal TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax HORizontal DELay Returns All settings for the window time base Examples HORizontal DELay Might return HORIZONTAL DELAY POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 5 0E 4 HORizontal DELay POSition Sets or queries the window time base horizontal position This command is equivalent to adjusting the Horizontal Position when Window Zone or Window is selected from the Horizontal menu Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DELay POSition lt NR3 gt HORizontal DELay POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is the position in seconds This value is the difference between the trigger point and the center graticule Positive values place the trigger before the center graticule Examples HORizontal DELay POSitio
44. data with a CURVe query but the lower order 8 bits of data will be zero SAMple is the default mode PEAKdetect specifies the display of the high low range of the samples taken from a single waveform acquisition The oscilloscope displays the high low range as a vertical range that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing AVErage specifies averaging mode where the resulting waveform shows an average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire NUMAV g command Examples ACQuire MODe PEAKdetect Displays a vertical area representing the range of the highest to lowest value of the acquired signal ACQuire MODe Might return SAMPLE Related Commands WFMPre PT_Fmt ACQuire NUMACq Query Only Indicates the number of acquisitions that have taken place since starting oscilloscope acquisition The maximum number of acquisitions that can be counted is 23 1 This value is reset to zero when you change most Acquisition Horizontal Vertical or Trigger arguments that affect the waveform except for the following m Changing the trigger level or trigger holdoff when in Sample or Peak Detect mode does not reset the value TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 47 Command Descriptions
45. folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query Examples SAVe WAVEform MATH REFB TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 195 Command Descriptions Saves the math waveform in stored waveform memory location REFB SAVe WAVEform CH1 A PROD TST FRQTSTO3 CSV Saves the channel 1 waveform data to the file FRQTSTO3 CSV in the folder A PROD TST on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Related Commands SELect lt wfm gt can be used to display a saved reference waveform SELect Query Only 2 196 Returns the display status of all waveforms Group Vertical Syntax SELect Returns Waveform display status Examples SELect 2 channel models with CH2 Math and REFB waveforms displayed would return SELECT CH1 0 CH2 1 MATH 1 REFA 0 REFB 1 4 channel models with CH1 through CH4 displayed Math disabled REFA displayed and REFD displayed would return SELECT CH1 1 CH2 1 CH3 1 CH4 1 MATH 0 REFA 1 REFB O REFC O REFD 1 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SELect lt wfm gt Controls the display of waveforms This command is equivalent to activating or deactivating a waveform from the oscilloscope front panel Group Vertical Syntax SELect lt wfm gt OFF ON lt NR1 gt SELect lt wfm gt Arguments OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 deactivates the display of t
46. may be Vrms OF lms depending on the type of source waveform HARmonics SAVe Set the file name and path to save harmonic data HARmonics SELect Set or query the selected harmonic HARmonics SETUp Set or query the operating mode for harmonics measurements commands HARmonics SHOW Set or query the specified harmonics HARmonics SOUrce Set or query the source in the harmonics menu HARmonics THDF Query the total harmonic distortion of the waveform as percent of fundamental HARmonics THDR Query the total harmonic distortion of the waveform as of input Vims POWerANALYSIS SOUrces Sets or query the power analysis sources SWLoss Return switching loss measurement settings SWLoss AC Quire Set or query the type of acquisition to use for SWLoss AVErage CONDUCTION Switching Loss commands Return the power loss of the device under test when the device is conducting TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 29 Command Groups Table 2 20 Power Measurement commands TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 only Cont Header Description SWLoss AVErage N Return the number of measurements used to calculate the averaged value for switching loss commands SWLoss AVErage TOTAL Return the sum of the turn on turn off and SWLoss AVErage TURNOFF conduction switching losses for an Average measurement Return the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning from on to off SWLoss AVErage TURNON
47. of the waveform at TDS1000B TDS2000B and the cursor position TPS2000 only CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Set or query the position of a vertical bar cursor CURSor VBArs SLOPE Return the value of the on screen dV dt TPS2000 with Power Analysis or dl dt measurement Module only TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 17 Command Groups Table 2 10 Cursor commands Cont Header Description CURSor VBArs UNIts Set or query the vertical cursors to time or frequency CURSor VBArs VDELTa Return the vertical distance between TDS1000B TDS2000B and cursors TPS2000 only Display Commands 2 18 Display commands let you change the graticule style displayed contrast and alter other display attributes Table 2 11 lists and describes Display commands Table 2 11 Display commands Header DiSplay DiSplay BRIGHTness TPS2000 only DiSplay CONTRast DiSplay FORMat DiSplay INVert not available on the TDS200 accepted as a legal command on theTDS2000B and TPS2000 but has no effect on these models DiSplay PERSistence DiSplay STYle Description Return display settings Set or query the LCD display brightness Set or query the LCD display contrast Set or query the YT or XY display Set or query the normal or inverted monochrome display Set or query the accumulate time Set or query the waveform display style TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Co
48. on the falling edge of the voltage waveform that defines where the beginning of the switching loss measurement ends SWLoss TONSTART Set or query a level on the falling edge of the voltage waveform that defines where the switching loss measurement begins SWLoss UNIts Set or query the units for Switching Loss Measure SWLoss VALue CONDUCTION SWLoss VALue TOTAL SWLoss VALue TURNOFF SWLoss VALue TURNON SWLoss VSAT WAVEFORMANALYSIS SOUrce ment Return the power loss of the device under test when the device is conducting in its on state Return the sum of the turn on turn off and conduction switching losses Return the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning between its on and off state Return the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning between its off and on state display Set or query the saturation voltage for the device under test Set or query the source for Waveform Analysis commands TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 31 Command Groups RS 232 Commands TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 Only RS 232 commands allow you to set or query the parameters that control the RS 232 port Table 2 21 lists and describes RS 232 commands Table 2 21 RS 232 commands Header Description RS232 Query RS232 parameters RS232 BAUd Set or query the baud rate RS232 HARDFlagging Set or query the hard flagging RS232 P
49. operation of the oscilloscope with your application program Refer to Synchronization Methods on page 3 10 for more information TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 57 Command Descriptions Group Status and error Syntax BUSY Returns 0 when the oscilloscope is not busy processing any of the commands listed in Table 2 30 OPC on page 2 170 1 when the oscilloscope is busy processing one of the commands listed in Table 2 30 OPC on page 2 170 Examples BUSY Might return 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is busy Related Commands OPC WAI CAL Query Only 2 58 Performs an internal self calibration and returns its status This is equivalent to selecting the Do Self Cal option in the Utility menu Although CAL is a query command it does perform an action NOTE The self calibration can take several minutes to complete During this time the oscilloscope does not execute any commands Disconnect all signals from the oscilloscope before performing an internal self calibration Group Calibration and Diagnostic TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax CAL Returns 0 indicates that the self calibration completed without any errors detected Any value other than zero indicates that the self calibration did not complete successfully or completed with errors Examples CAL Performs a self calibration and mi
50. or TDS2CMA communications module or MM measurement module TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 143 Command Descriptions 2 144 Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2MEM modules TEKTRONIX lt model number gt CF 91 1CT TDS2MEM FV v lt module firmware version number gt Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TPS2000 oscilloscopes TEKTRONIX lt model number gt CF 91 1CT FV v lt oscilloscope firmware version number gt TPS2XXXV v lt module firmware version number gt Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes TEKTRONIX lt model number gt lt serial number gt CF 91 1CT FV v lt oscilloscope firmware version number gt Examples IDN Might return the following response with a TDS2CMA installed ID TEKTRONIX TDS 220 0 CF 91 1CT FV v2 12 TDS2CM CMV v1 04 Might return the following response with a TDS2MEM installed ID TEKTRONIX TDS 2022 0 CF 91 1CT TDS2MEM FV v6 00 Might return the following response for a TPS2012 oscilloscope with a TPS2PWRI1 power analysis module installed TEKTRONIX TPS 2012 0 CF 91 1CT FV v9 48 TPS2PWR1 v1 00 Might return the following response for a TPS2022B oscilloscope with the serial number CU10100 TEKTRONIX TDS 2022B CU10100 CF 91 1CT FV v20 22 Might return the following response for a TDS1012B oscilloscope with the serial numbe C
51. or USB bus These commands and queries are defined by IEEE Std 488 2 1987 and Tek Standard Codes and Formats 1989 and begin with an asterisk character Table 2 23 lists and describes Status and Error commands Table 2 23 Status and Error commands Header Description ALLEv Return all events BUSY Return oscilloscope busy status CLS Clear status TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 33 Command Groups Trigger Commands 2 34 Table 2 23 Status and Error commands Cont Header Description DESE Set or query the device event status enable ESE Set or query the standard event status enable ESR Return standard event status register this is the usual way to determine whether a set command executed without error EVENT Return event code EVMsg Return event message EVQty Return number of events in queue OPC Set or query the operation complete PSC Set or query the power on status clear SRE Set or query the service request enable STB Read status byte WAI Wait to continue Trigger commands control all aspects of oscilloscope triggering The three types of triggers are edge pulse width and video Edge triggering is the default type Edge triggering lets you acquire a waveform when the signal passes through a voltage level of your choosing Pulse width triggering lets you trigger on normal or aberrant pulses Video triggering adds the capability of triggering on vid
52. the repeated BUSY results in more bus traffic TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 13 Status and Events Using the OPC Set Command If the corresponding status registers are enabled the OPC command sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when an operation is complete You can use this command in conjunction with either a serial poll or service request handler to achieve synchronization Serial Poll Method GPIB and USB Only Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands When the operation is complete the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR is enabled and the Event Status Bit ESB in the Status Byte Register is enabled The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization with serial polling looks like this Set up single sequence acquisition SELECT CH1 ON ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE 0 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PK2PK MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC While serial poll 0 keep looping Take peak to peak measurement on acquired data 3 14 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 P
53. 00 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions TRIGger MAIn ViDeo LINE TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the line number for the video trigger when TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SYNC is set to LINENUM This is equivalent to selecting a line number in the Trigger Video menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn VIDeo LINE lt NR1 gt TRIGger MAIn VIDeo LINE Arguments lt NR1 gt specifies the line number The minimum is 1 The maximum is 525 for NTSC 625 for PAL and SECAM Examples The following sequence sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video line 123 TRIGger MAIn TYPe VIDeo TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SYNC LINENum TRIGger MAIn VIDeo LINE 123 TRIGger MAIn ViDeo POLarity Sets or queries the video trigger polarity This is equivalent to selecting the Polarity option in the Trigger Video menu Group Trigger TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 235 Command Descriptions Syntax TDS210 and TDS220 models with firmware below V2 00 and a TDS2CMA communications module TRIGger MAIn VIDeo POLarity INVERTed NORMa1 All other oscilloscope firmware version and module combinations TRIGger MAIn VIDeo POLarity INVert NORMal TRIGger MAIn VIDeo POLarity Arguments INVERTed or INVert specifies a positive sync pulse NORMal specifies a negative sync pulse Examples TRIGger MAIn VIDeo POLarity NORMAL Selects negative synchronizati
54. 000 Series Only Recalls a stored waveform from the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or from the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only into a reference location TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 183 Command Descriptions Group Save and Recall Syntax RECA11 WAVEForm lt file path gt REF lt x gt Arguments lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the location and name of the waveform file to recall If you do not specify a path to the folder the oscilloscope looks for the file in the current working folder The current folder refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query REF lt x gt is the oscilloscope reference memory location in which to load the waveform You must load a saved waveform into a reference memory location before displaying the waveform Examples RECA11 WAVEForm A TST PRD TST 01 CSV REFC Loads the waveform file TST 01 CSV into reference memory RefC Then use SELect REFC to display this waveform Related Commands SAVe WAVEForm SELect lt wfm gt REM Set Only 2 184 Specifies a comment This line is ignored by the oscilloscope Group Miscellaneous Syntax REM lt QString gt Arguments lt QString gt is a string that can have a maximum of 80 characters TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Examples REM This is a comment This command is i
55. 01 2003 Digital Photo Solutions for Imaging Devices Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support m In North America call 1 800 833 9200 m Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area E Table of Contents Preface iseit see cane AEE E E ie ae oes vii Related Documents 0 0 0 ccc eee eee nee vil Gonventions i ee seke ee ee a ee eed xi Getting Started Getting Started osses eck Si eke sien inh we ee ee he es 1 1 Syntax and Commands Command Syntax ccc cece cece cece cere ee nee 2 1 Command and Query Structure 0 0 02 ee eee 2 2 Command Entry 0 0 cece eee eee eee 2 6 Constructed Mnemonics 0 cee cece cee eens 2 9 Argument Types isi a Ned oe E es eid ote oleae 2 11 Command Groups cece cee cece cece cere cence 2 15 Acquisition Commands 0 00 eee eee eee eee 2 15 Calibration and Diagnostic Commands 2 16 Cursor Commands nsus cece ee cen eee eens 2 17 Display Commands 0 cece eee eee ee eee 2 18 File System Commands TDS2MEM Module TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Only 0 8 2 19 Hard Copy Commands ketit ate an eee 2 20 Horizontal Commands 0 000 cece eee ee nee ene 2 21 Math Commands siy casecnscea vin gon gia e Sabi ocd 4G
56. 1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Set or query the position of waveform to display Return waveform record length Same as HORizontal MAIn SCAle Same as HORizontal MAIn SCAle Select view Description Query the definition for the math waveform Set or query the math wave form definition Return all math FFT param eters Set or query the FFT hori zontal display position TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 15 Math commands Cont Header MATH FFT HORizontal SCAle TDS200 with a TDS2MM module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Description Set or query the FFT hori zontal zoom factor MATH FFT VERtical POSition TDS200 with a TDS2MM module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Set or query the FFT vertical display position MATH FFT VERtical SCAle TDS200 with a TDS2MM module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Set or query the FFT vertical zoom factor MATH VERtical MATH VERtical POSition TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Return all math vertical waveform parameters Set or query the math wave form display position MATH VERtical SCAle TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Measurement Commands Set or query the math wave form display scale Measurement commands control the automated measurement system The oscilloscope can display up to fou
57. 1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer SSS SE ae Programming Examples aay A ans Programming Examples The following series of commands and queries illustrate many of the most common commands and techniques Table 2 1 on page 2 1 lists oscilloscopes extension modules and the communication protocol you can use with them To use these commands and queries over USB you will need to use a program or routines that interface to the USBTMC driver on your PC You can also use the PC Communications software that came on the CD with your oscilloscope to get the same data without having to write programs For operating information you can launch the PC Communications software and refer to the online help To use these commands and queries over GPIB you will need to use a program or routines that interface to the GPIB hardware in your computer The software is usually supplied by the GPIB hardware manufacturer To use these commands and queries over RS 232 you will need to use a communications program on your computer such as tip in the Unix environment or Hyperterminal in the Microsoft Windows environment In these examples data sent from the controller computer to the oscilloscope is prefaced with the gt symbol Replies from the oscilloscope have no preface gt rem Check for any messages and clear them from the queue gt esr 128 gt allev ALLEV 401 Power on gt rem Set the scope to the default state gt f
58. 107 109 107 106 105 103 100 97 90 84 80 m Binary data can be represented by signed integer or positive integer values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified Table 2 27 lists the ranges for one and two byte wide data Table 2 27 Binary data ranges Byte width Signed integer range Positive integer range 1 128 to 127 0 to 255 2 32 768 to 32 767 0 to 65 535 The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are transferred giving a total of four binary formats RIBinary RPBinary SRIbinary and SRPbinary TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 41 Command Groups 2 42 RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first and RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respectively but use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred first The byte order is ignored when DATa WIDth is set to 1 Waveform Data Record You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record You can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record The DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands let you specify the first and last data points of the waveform record When transferring data into the oscilloscope you must specify the location of the first data point within the waveform record For example when
59. 16 Changing WFMPre BYT_Or changes DATa ENCdg Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre BYT Or LSB MSB WFMPre BYT Or Arguments LSB selects the least significant byte to be transmitted first MSB selects the most significant byte to be transmitted first Examples WFMPre BYT Or MSB specifies that the most significant byte in the waveform data is transferred first WFMPre BYT Or Returns either MSB or LSB depending on which data byte is transferred first Related Commands DATa ENCdg WFMPre ENCdg Sets or queries the type of encoding for waveform data transferred with the CURVe command Changing WFMPre ENCdg also changes DATa ENCdg TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 247 Command Descriptions Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre ENCdg ASC BIN WFMPre ENCdg Arguments ASC specifies ASCII curve data BIN specifies binary curve data Examples WFMPre ENCdg ASC Specifies that the waveform data is in ASCII format WFMPre ENCdg Might return BIN indicating that the waveform data is in binary format Related Commands DATa ENCdg WFMPre NR_Pt Query Only 2 248 Returns the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform record as specified by DATa SOUrce The number of points depends on DATa STARt DATa STOP and whether DATa SOUrce is YT or FFT NR_Pt is at most 2500 for YT and 1024 for FFT NR_Pt is always at least one When the DATa SOUtrce is not displayed the TDS
60. 18 Display commands DISPLAY 2 97 DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS 2 97 DISPLAY CONTRAST 2 98 DISPLAY FORMAT 2 99 DISPLAY INVERT 2 100 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 2 100 DISPLAY STYLE 2 101 DISPLAY 2 97 DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS 2 97 DISPLAY CONTRAST 2 98 DISPLAY FORMAT 2 99 DISPLAY INVERT 2 100 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 2 100 DISPLAY STYLE 2 101 Documentation vii TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index 3 Index E Entering commands 2 6 Entering incorrect numeric argu ments 2 11 EOM end of message 2 8 Error message programming interface 3 17 ERRORLOG FIRST 2 102 ERRORLOG NEXT 2 102 ESE 2 103 3 5 ESER register 2 103 2 181 3 5 ESR 2 104 ESR query 3 2 Event handling 3 1 Event query 2 105 Event queue 2 105 3 7 Event queue sequence 3 8 EVENT 2 105 EVMSG 2 105 EVQTY 2 106 Example programming 4 1 Examples block argument 2 14 Programming 4 1 quoted strings 2 13 F FACTORY 2 107 Factory setup detailed description B 1 File system command group 2 19 File system commands FILESYSTEM 2 108 FILESYSTEM CWD 2 109 FILESYSTEM DELETE 2 110 FILESYSTEM DIR 2 110 FILESYSTEM FORMAT 2 111 FILES YSTEM FREESPACE 2 112 FILESYSTEM MKDIR 2 113 FILESYSTEM RENAME 2 114 FILESYSTEM RMDIR 2 115 FILESYSTEM 2 108 FILESYSTEM CwD 2 109 FILESYSTEM DELETE 2 110 FILESYSTEM DIR 2 110 FILESYSTEM FORMAT 2 111 FILESYSTEM FREESPACE 2 112 FILESYSTEM MKDIR 2 113 FILESYS
61. 2 64 CH lt x gt CURRENTPROBE 2 65 CH lt x gt INVERT 2 66 CH lt x gt POSITION 2 67 CH lt x gt PROBE 2 68 CH lt x gt SCALE 2 69 CH lt x gt VOLTS 2 70 CH lt x gt YUNIT 2 71 Channel command mnemonic 2 9 Clear status 2 71 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index 1 Index CLS 2 71 Command abbreviating 2 6 argument 2 3 block argument 2 13 BUSY 3 13 common 2 25 2 33 concatenating 2 6 definition 2 4 header 2 3 message 2 2 mnemonic 2 3 OPC 3 14 query 2 2 separator 2 3 set 2 2 synchronizing 3 10 syntax 2 1 BNF Backus Naur form 2 2 WAI 3 11 Command argument numeric 2 11 quoted string 2 12 Command entry rules 2 6 Command group acquisition 2 15 calibration and diagnostic 2 16 cursor 2 17 display 2 18 file system TDS2MEM only 2 19 hardcopy 2 20 horizontal 2 21 math 2 22 measurement 2 23 miscellaneous 2 25 PictBridge 2 27 power and battery related 2 28 power measurements 2 28 RS 232 2 32 save and recall 2 32 status and error 2 33 trigger 2 34 vertical 2 36 waveform 2 37 Command mnemonic CH lt x gt 2 9 channel 2 9 MEAS lt x gt 2 10 measurement specifier 2 10 REF lt x gt 2 9 reference waveform 2 9 waveform 2 10 lt wfm gt 2 10 Command syntax BNF Backus Naur form 2 2 Common command 2 33 Common GPIB commands CAL 2 58 CALIBRATE CONTINUE 2 60 CALIBRATE FACTory 2 60 CALIBRATE INTERNAL 2 61 CALIBRATE STAT
62. 20 oscilloscope firmware below V 2 00 with a TDS2CMA communications module YZEro is a value expressed in YUNits used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is digitizer levels value_in_YUNits curve_in_d YOFF_in_dl YMUIt YZERO_in_YUNits YZEro is used when calculating cursor readouts The set form of this command affects the reference waveform specified by DATA DESTination The query form of this command returns a value for the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce If that waveform is not active or displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions execution error with event code 2244 waveform requested is not active NOTE For the TDS210 or TDS220 oscilloscope firmware below V 2 00 with a TDS2CMA communications module the set form is ignored The query always returns zero Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre YZEro lt NR3 gt WFMPre YZEro Arguments lt NR3 gt is a value expressed in YUNits WFMPre Additional Commands for Compatibility The set form of these additional commands is ignored The query form generates event messages 100 Command Error and 420 Query Unterminated These commands are included for compati bility purposes only Table 2 31 lists additional WFMPre commands Table 2 31 Additional WFMPre commands Command Argument Description
63. 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer A 1 Appendix A ASCII Code Chart SI US I 0 0 RUBOUT F 15 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 4F 79 5F 9 e m 17 octal 25 KEY N A K ASCII character hex 15 21 decimal A 2 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer ay es Appendix B Factory Setup The following listing is the instrument response to the concatenated command FACtory SET This response describes the factory default setup in detail Carriage returns have been inserted for clarity Items enclosed in parentheses are returned by the SET query response but are not changed by the FACtory command TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Oscilloscopes This is a typical response for 2 channel models with a monochrome display HEADER 1 VERBOSE 13 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DESTINATION REFA SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 2500 WIDTH 1 LOCK NONE DISPLAY FORMAT YT STYLE VECTORS PERSISTENCE 0 CONTRAST 50 INVERT OFF sACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE NUMAVG 16 STATE 1 STOPAFTER RUNSTOP CH1 PROBE 1 0E1 CURRENTPROBE 1 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF YUNIT V CH2 PROBE 1 0E1 CURRENTPROBE 1 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF YUNIT V sHORIZONTAL VIEW MAINSMAIN SCALE 5 0E 4 POSITION 0 0E0 HORIZONTAL DELAY SCALE 5 0E 5 POSITION 0 0E0 TRIGGER MAIN MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE HOLDOFF VALUE 5 0E 7 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPL
64. 2000 Programmer 2 83 Command Descriptions CURVe 2 84 Transfers oscilloscope waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in binary or ASCII format Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that contains information such as data format and scale For information about the waveform preamble refer to WFMPre Query Only on page 2 244 The data format is specified by the DATa ENCdg and DATa WIDth com mands The CURVe query sends data from the oscilloscope to an external device The data source is specified by the DATa SOUrce command The first and last data points that are transferred are specified by the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands NOTE If the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command is not displayed the CURVe query returns nothing and generates events 2244 Waveform requested is not activated and 420 Query UNTERMINATED In Scan Mode Sec di 2100 ms and AUTO Mode approximately one division s worth of data points will be invalid due to the blanked moving cursor The CURVe set command sends waveform data from an external device to the oscilloscope The data is stored in the stored waveform location specified by DATa DESTination starting with the data point specified by DATa STARt Only one waveform can be transferred at a time The waveform will only be displayed if the reference waveform is displayed Refer to Waveform Commands on page 2 38 for a description of the wavef
65. 210 and TDS220 firmware below V 2 00 with a TDS2CMA communications module will return a value All other oscilloscope firmware version and module combinations will generate an error and will return event code 2244 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre NR_Pt Examples WFMPre NR_Pt Returns lt NR1 gt which is the number of data points If DATa WIDth is 2 then there are lt NR1 gt 2 bytes in the curve Related Commands DATa ENCdg DATa SOUrce DATa STARt DATa STOP WFMPre PT_Fmt The set form of this command sets the format Y or ENV of the reference waveform specified by the DATa DESTination command The query form returns the format of the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command if that waveform is on or displayed If the waveform is not displayed the query form of this command generates an error and returns event code 2244 Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre PT Fmt ENV Y WFMPre PT_ Fmt Arguments Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is transmitted for each point in the waveform record For Y format the time absolute coordinate of a point relative to the trigger can be calculated using the following formula N ranges from 0 to 2499 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 249 Command Descriptions X XZEro XINcr n PT_OFf For Y format the magnitude u
66. 2E0 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 s MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD SOURCE CH1 MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 lt FFT HORIZONTAL POSITION 5 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 gt lt MATH FFT VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 1 0E0 gt HARDCOPY FORMAT EPSON PORT CENTRONICS LAYOUT PORTRAIT LANGUAGE ENGLISH TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer B 9 Appendix B Factory Setup B 10 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Glossary and Index EE Se Glossary ASCII Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange Controllers transmit commands to the digitizing oscilloscope using ASCII character encoding Address A 7 bit code that identifies an instrument on the communication bus The digitizing oscilloscope must have a unique address for the controller to recognize and transmit commands to it Backus Naur Form BNF A standard notation system for command syntax The syntax in this manual use BNF notation Controller A computer or other device that sends commands to and accepts responses from the digitizing oscilloscope EOI A mnemonic referring to the control line End or Identify on the GPIB interface bus One of the two possible end of message terminators EOM A generic acronym referring to the end of message terminator For GPIB
67. 55 WFMPRE YOFF 2 256 WFMPRE YUNIT 2 257 WFMPRE Y ZERO 2 258 WEMPRE ZMULT 2 259 WFMPRE ZOFF 2 259 WFMPRE ZUNIT 2 260 Waveform preamble 2 43 WAVEFORMANALY SIS SOURCE 2 242 WAVFRM 2 243 lt wfm gt command mnemonic 2 10 WEMPRE 2 244 WFMPRE lt wfm gt 2 260 2 263 WFMPRE lt wfm gt NR_PT 2 261 WFMPRE lt wfm gt PT_FMT 2 261 WFMPRE lt wfm gt PT_OFF 2 261 2 262 WEMPRE lt wfm gt WFLD 2 262 WFEMPRE lt wfm gt XINCR 2 262 WFEMPRE lt wfm gt XUNIT 2 262 WFEMPRE lt wfm gt XZERO 2 262 WFEMPRE lt wfm gt YMULT 2 262 WFEMPRE lt wfm gt Y OFF 2 263 WFEMPRE lt wfm gt Y ZERO 2 263 WEMPRE BIT_NR 2 244 WEMPRE BN_FMT 2 245 WEMPRE BYT_NR 2 246 WEMPRE BYT_ OR 2 247 WEMPRE ENCDG 2 247 WEMPRE NR_PT 2 248 WEMPRE PT_FMT 2 249 WEMPRE PT_OFF 2 251 WFEMPRE WFID 2 251 WEMPRE XINCR 2 252 WEMPRE XMULT 2 259 WFEMPRE XOFF 2 259 WFEMPRE XUNIT 2 253 WEMPRE XZERO 2 254 WEMPRE YMULT 2 255 WEMPRE YOFF 2 256 WFEMPRE YUNIT 2 257 WEMPRE YZERO 2 258 WEMPRE ZMULYT 2 259 WFEMPRE ZOFF 2 259 WFMPRE ZUNIT 2 260 Index 14 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer
68. 72 XX Korean 071 1073 XX Russian 071 1074 XX For information on the TDS2MEM Storage Memory and Commu nications module refer to the TDS2MEM Storage Memory and Communications Module User Manual 071 1262 XX an optional accessory that includes all eleven languages TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer ix Preface TDS200 Series Manuals For general operation refer to the TDS200 Series Digital Real Time Oscilloscope User Manual a standard accessory Language TDS200 series user manual part number English 071 0398 XX French 071 0400 XX Italian 071 0401 XX German 071 0402 XX Spanish 071 0399 XX Japanese 071 0405 XX Portuguese 071 0403 XX Simplified Chinese 071 0406 XX Traditional Chinese 071 0407 XX Korean 071 0408 XX Russian 071 0404 XX For information on the TDS2CMA Communications module or TDS2MM Math Measurements module refer to the TDS200 Series Extension Modules Instructions Manual 071 0409 XX a standard accessory for extension modules in English only x TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Preface Service Manuals English Only For information on how to service your oscilloscope refer to the appropriate manual from the following optional accessories m TPS2000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual 071 1465 XX TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual 071 1828 XX m TDS1000 and TDS2000 Ser
69. ARity Set or query the parity type RS232 SOFTFlagging Set or query the soft flagging RS232 TRANsmit TERMinator Set or query the end of line terminator Refer to Table 2 1 on page 2 1 for a list of products that are compatible with RS 2372 Save and Recall Commands Save and Recall commands allow you to store and retrieve internal waveforms and settings When you save a setting you save most of the settings of the oscilloscope When you then recall a setting the oscilloscope restores itself to the state it was in when you saved that setting To display a saved waveform use the SELect lt wfm gt command described on page 2 197 Table 2 22 lists and describes Save and Recall commands 2 32 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 22 Save and Recall commands Header Description RCL Recall setting RECAII SETUp Recall saved oscilloscope setting RECAII WAVEform Recall saved waveform SAV Save oscilloscope setting SAVe IMAge Save screen image to file TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only SAVe IMAge FILEFormat Set screen image file format TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only SAVe SETUp Save oscilloscope setting SAVe WAVEform Save waveform Status and Error Commands Status and error commands let you determine the status of the oscilloscope and control events Several commands and queries are common to all devices on the GPIB
70. BRATED indicates that the oscilloscope cannot predict the battery charge remaining NOTINSTALLED indicates that the battery is not installed in the oscilloscope NORMAL indicates that the battery status is not any of the states listed above Examples POWER BATTERY1 STATUS Might return FULL which indicates that Battery 1 is at maximum capacity POWer BATTERIES TIME Query Only TPS2000 Series Only 2 178 Returns the charge remaining in both batteries This value is not accurate when either battery is uncalibrated Group Power and Battery Related TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax POWer BATTERIES TIME Returns lt NR1 gt specifies the operating time remaining for both batteries in minutes Examples POWER BATTERIES TIME Might return 10 specifying that the battery or batteries installed can provide about 10 minutes of power to the oscilloscope POWer BUTTONLIGHT TPS2000 Series Only Turns the lights on the front panel buttons of the TPS2000 on and off Group Power and Battery Related Syntax POWer BUTTONLIGHT lt NR1 gt ON OFF POWer BUTTONLIGHT Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns the lights on OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns the lights off Examples POWER BUTTONLIGHT ON Sets the front panel button lights to on TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 179 Command Descriptions POWerANALYSIS
71. CENTRONICS LAYOUT PORTRAIT LANGUAGE ENGLISH TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer B 7 Appendix B Factory Setup TDS224 Oscilloscopes Items enclosed in lt gt brackets are present only when the TDS2MM module is installed HEADER 1 VERBOSE 13 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DESTINATION REFA SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 2500 WIDTH 1 LOCK NONE DISPLAY FORMAT YT STYLE VECTORS PERSISTENCE 0 CONTRAST 50 s ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE NUMAVG 16 STATE 1 STOPAFTER RUNSTOP CH1 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF CH2 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF CH3 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF CH4 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF HORIZONTAL VIEW MAIN MAIN SCALE 5 0E 4 POSITION 0 0E0 HORIZONTAL DELAY SCALE 5 0E 5 POSITION 0 0E0 TRIGGER MAIN MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE HOLDOFF VALUE 5 0E 7 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO SOURCE CH1 SYNC LINE POLARITY NORMAL TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL 0 0E0 SELECT CH1 1 CH2 0 CH3 0 CH4 O MATH O REFA 0 REFB O REFC 0 REFD 0 CURSOR FUNCTION OFF SELECT SOURCE CH1 B 8 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Appendix B Factory Setup CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 2 0E 3 POSITION2 2 0E 3 CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 3 2E0 POSITION2 3
72. DS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SEQuence specifies single sequence operation where the oscilloscope stops after it has acquired enough waveforms to satisfy the conditions of the acquisition mode For example if the acquisition mode is set to sample the oscilloscope stops after digitizing a waveform from a single trigger event However if the acquisition mode is set to average 64 waveforms then the oscillo scope stops only after acquiring all 64 waveforms The ACQuire STATE command and the front panel RUN STOP button also stop acquisitions when the oscilloscope is in single sequence mode Examples ACQuire STOPAfter RUNSTop Sets the oscilloscope to stop the acquisition when you press the front panel RUN STOP button ACQuire STOPAfter Might return SEQUENCE ALLEv Query Only Causes the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages and removes the returned events from the Event Queue The messages are separated by commas Use the ESR query to enable the events to be returned For a complete discussion of how to use these registers refer to page 3 1 This command is similar to repeatedly sending EVMsg queries to the oscilloscope Group Status and error Syntax ALLEv TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 51 Command Descriptions Returns The event code and message in the following format lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt
73. Descriptions If the CLS command immediately follows an lt EOI gt the Output Queue and MAV bit Status Byte Register bit 4 are also cleared MAV indicates information is in the output queue The device clear DCL GPIB control message and the USBTMC INITIATE_CLEAR control message will clear the output queue and also MAV CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV CLS can suppress a service request that is to be generated by an OPC command This will happen if a hard copy output or single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed when the CLS command is executed Refer to Registers on page 3 1 for more information Group Status and Error Syntax CLS Related Commands DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB CURSor Query Only 2 72 Returns current cursor settings Group Cursor Syntax CURSor Returns Oscilloscope cursor settings Examples CURSor TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Might return the following string as the current cursor settings CURSOR FUNCTION VBARS SELECT SOURCE CH1 CUR SOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 0 0E0 POSITION2 4 48E 3 CURSOR HBARS UNITS VOLTS POSITION1 0 0E0 POSI TION2 5 0E 1 CURSor FUNCtion Selects and displays the oscilloscope cursor type Cursors are attached to the waveform selected by CURSor SELect SOUrce This command is equivalent to setting the Type option in the Cursor menu Se
74. EM module t RS 232 included in the oscilloscope firmware NOTE If you use GPIB with the TDS1000B or TDS2000B series you can set a unique GPIB address for the oscilloscope through the UTILITY gt Options gt GPIB Setup option 1 2 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Syntax and Commands Ey aS as Command Syntax You can control the oscilloscope through the GPIB RS 232 or USB interface using a large group of commands and queries This section describes the syntax these commands and queries use and the conventions the oscilloscope uses to process them The commands and queries themselves are listed in the Command Descriptions section Table 2 1 Oscilloscope communication protocol Model or option GPIB RS 232 USB TDS2CM TDS2CMA TDS2CMAX Ec i No TDS2MM No TDS2MEM No TDS1000 or TDS2000 No TDS1000B or TDS2000B Yes TPS2000 No Function available with a TDS2CM TDS2CMA or TDS2CMAX module t Function available with a TDS2MEM module Function available with a TEK USB 488 adapter You transmit commands to the oscilloscope using the enhanced American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII character encoding Appendix A contains a chart of the ASCII character set TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 1 Command Syntax The Backus Naur Form BNF notation is used in this manual to describe commands and queries Table 2 2 lists the BNF not
75. EMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD SOURCE1 CH1 lt SOURCE2 CH2 gt MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 2 0E0 sMATH FFT HORIZONTAL POSITION 5 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 1 0E0 HARDCOPY BUTTON PRINTS FORMAT EPSON PORT CENTRONICS LAYOUT PORTRAIT INKSAVER ON LANGUAGE ENGLISH AUTORANGE SETTINGS BOTH SAVE IMAGE FILE FORMAT BMP POWERANALYSTS SOURCES CH1CH2 gt WAVEFORMANALYSIS SOURCE CH1 gt s HARMONICS ENABLE OFF SETUP AUTOMATIC SHOW ALL SELECT 1 SOURCE CH1 gt SWLOSS ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS ENABLE OFF SOURCES CH1CH2 STOPAFTER 50 TONSTART 90 TONEND 10 TOFFSTART 10 TOFFEND 10 VSAT 1 0E0 UNITS WATTS gt A A A A B 4 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Appendix B Factory Setup TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Oscilloscopes Items enclosed in lt gt angle brackets are present only when the TDS2MEM module is installed Responses for channel 3 and 4 apply only to 4 channel models HEADER 1 VERBOSE 1 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DESTINATION REFA SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 2500 WIDTH 1 LOCK NONE DISPLAY FORMAT YT STYLE VECTORS PERSISTENCE 0 CONTRAST 50 INVERT OFF sACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE NUMAVG 16 STATE 1 STOPAFTER RUNSTOP CH1 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF CH2 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF CH3 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COU
76. For more information on event handling refer to the Status and Events chapter Examples DESE 209 Sets the DESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits DESE Might return the following string DESE 186 showing that DESER contains the binary value 10111010 Related Commands CLS ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 95 Command Descriptions DIAg RESUIt FLAg Query Only Returns the Pass Fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution those run automatically at power on or those requested through the Service Menu Use the DIAg RESUIt LOG query to determine which test s has failed Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg RESUIt FLAg Returns PASS means that the oscilloscope passes all diagnostic tests FAIL means that the oscilloscope has failed at least one of the diagnostic tests Examples DIAg RESUIt FLAG Returns either PASS or FAIL DIAg RESUIt LOG Query Only 2 96 Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution those run automatically at power on or those requested through the Service Menu The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the pass or fail status of each Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg RESU1t LOG TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions
77. ING DC SLOPE RISE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer B 1 Appendix B Factory Setup TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO SOURCE CH1 SYNC LINE POLARITY NORMAL LINE 1 STANDARD NTSC TRIGGER MAIN PULSE SOURCE CH1 WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN EQUAL WIDTH 1 0E 3 TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL 0 0E0 SELECT CH1 1 CH2 0 MATH O REFA 0 REFB 0 CURSOR FUNCTION OFF SELECT SOURCE CH1 CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 2 0E 3 POSITIONZ2 2 0E 3 CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 3 2E0 POSITION2 3 2E0 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 gt MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS5 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD SOURCE1 CH1 MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 2 0E0 MATH FFT HORIZONTAL POSITION 5 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 1 0E0 HARDCOPY BUTTON PRINTS FORMAT JPEG PORT USB LAYOUT PORTRAIT INKSAVER ON PICTBRIDGE PAPERSIZE DEFLT IMAGESIZE DEFLT PAPERTYPE DEFLT PRINTQUAL DEFLT DATEPRINT DEFLT IDPRINT DEFLT LANGUAGE ENGLISH AUTORANGE SETTINGS BOTH SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT JPEG TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Appendix B Factory Setup TPS2000 Series Oscilloscopes Items enclosed in lt gt brackets are present only when the TPS2PWR1 Power Application Module software key is installed
78. INT 2 174 PICTBRIDGE DEF 2 171 PICTBRIDGE IDPRINT 2 175 PICTBRIDGE IMAGESIZE 2 172 PICTBRIDGE PAPERSIZE 2 171 PICTBRIDGE PAPERTYPE 2 173 PICTBRIDGE PRINTQUAL 2 174 PICTBRIDGE DATEPRINT 2 174 PICTBRIDGE DEF 2 171 PICTBRIDGE IDPRINT 2 175 PICTBRIDGE IMAGESIZE 2 172 PICTBRIDGE PAPERSIZE 2 171 PICTBRIDGE PAPERTYPE 2 173 PICTBRIDGE PRINTQUAL 2 174 Power and Battery Related com mand group 2 28 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index 7 Index Power and Battery Related com mands POWER 2 176 POWER AC PRESENT 2 176 POWER BATTERIES TIME 2 178 POWER BATTERY lt x gt GAS GAUGE 2 177 POWER BATTERY lt x gt STA TUS 2 178 POWER BUTTONLIGHT 2 179 Power Measurement command group 2 28 Power Measurement commands HARMONICS 2 123 HARMONICS ENABLE 2 124 HARMONICS FREQUENCY 2 124 HARMONICS HRMS 2 125 HARMONICS PERCENT 2 126 HARMONICS PHASE 2 126 HARMONICS RMS 2 127 HARMONICS SAVE 2 127 HARMONICS SELECT 2 128 HARMONICS SETUP 2 129 HARMONICS SHOW 2 130 HARMONICS SOURCE 2 131 HARMONICS THDF 2 131 HARMONICS THDR 2 132 POWERANALYSIS SOURCES 2 180 SWLOSS 2 200 SWLOSS ACQUIRE 2 200 SWLOSS AVERAGE CON DUCTION 2 201 SWLOSS AVERAGE N 2 202 SWLOSS AVERAGE TOTAL 2 203 Index 8 SWLOSS AVERAGE TURN OFF 2 203 SWLOSS AVERAGE TUR NON 2 204 SWLOSS ENABLE 2 205 SWLOSS LEVELS 2 206 SWLOSS LOG CONDUC TION 2 206 SWLO
79. INUE Perform the next step in the factory calibration sequence CALibrate FACtory Initialize the factory calibration sequence CALibrate INTERNAL Perform an internal self calibration CALibrate STATUS Return PASS or FAIL status of the last self or factory calibration operation DIAg RESUIt FLAG Return diagnostic tests status DIAg RESUIt LOG Return diagnostic test sequence results ERRLOG FIRST Returns first entry from error log ERRLOG NEXT Returns next entry from error log 2 16 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Cursor Commands Cursor commands provide control over the oscilloscope cursor display and readout Table 2 10 lists and describes Cursor com mands Table 2 10 Cursor commands Header Description CURSor Return cursor settings CURSor FUNCtion Set or query the cursors on or off select cursor type CURSor HBArs Return horizontal bar settings CURSor HBArs DELTa Return vertical distance between horizontal bar cursors CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Set or query the position of a horizontal bar cursor CURSor HBArs UNIts Query vertical scale units CURSor SELect SOUrce Select waveform CURSor VBArs Return vertical bar settings CURSor VBArs DELTa Return horizontal distance between cursors CURSor VBArs HDELTa Return horizontal distance between TDS1000B TDS2000B and cursors Same as CURSor VBArs DEL TPS2000 only Ta CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Return the amplitude
80. In some commands you can specify a waveform without regard to its type channel waveform math waveform or reference waveform The y is the same as x in Reference Waveform Mnemonics Symbol Meaning lt wim gt Can be CH lt x gt MATH or REF lt y gt Cursor Position Mnemonic When the oscilloscope displays cursors commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use Symbol POSITION lt x gt Meaning A cursor selector lt x gt is 1 or 2 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header The oscilloscope can display up to four TDS200 or five TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 automated measurements Symbol MEAS lt x gt Meaning A measurement specifier lt x gt is 1 4 TDS200 or 1 5 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 2 10 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Syntax Argument Types A command argument can be in one of several forms The individual descriptions of each command tell which argument types to use with that command Numeric Arguments Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments Table 2 5 lists the three types of numeric argument Table 2 5 Types of numeric arguments Symbol Meaning lt NR1 gt Signed integer value lt NR2 gt Floating point value without an exponent lt NR3 gt Floating point value with an exponent The
81. M DIR 2 110 FILESYSTEM FORMAT 2 111 FILES YSTEM FREESPACE 2 112 FILESYSTEM MKDIR 2 113 FILESYSTEM RMDIR 2 115 HARDCOPY BUTTON 2 117 RECALL SETUP 2 182 RECALL WAVEFORM 2 183 SAVE IMAGE 2 192 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT 2 193 SAVE SETUP 2 194 SAVE WAVEFORM 2 195 TIME 2 220 TDS2MEM specific commands FILESYSTEM RENAME 2 114 TDS2MM measurement module where to find installation infor mation 1 1 TDS2MM telated commands CH lt x gt INVERT 2 66 MATH DEFINE 2 147 MATH FFT HORIZON TAL POSITION 2 150 MATH FFT HORIZON TAL SCALE 2 151 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSI TION 2 152 MATH FFT VERTICAL SCALE 2 153 MATHVERTICAL 2 150 2 154 MEA SUREMENT IMMED TYPE 2 158 MEA SUREMENT MEAS lt X gt TY PE 2 164 WFMPRE lt wfm gt YOFF 2 263 WFMPRE WFID 2 251 WFMPRE XINCR 2 252 WFMPRE XZERO 2 254 WFMPRE YMULT 2 255 WFMPRE YOFF 2 256 WFMPRE YUNIT 2 257 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index 11 Index WFMPRE YZERO 2 258 Tek Std Codes and Formats 1989 2 25 2 33 Terminator command message 2 8 TIME 2 220 Time base manual trigger simula tion 2 221 Transferring data from the oscilloscope 2 43 to the oscilloscope 2 44 TRG 2 221 TRIGGER 2 221 Trigger command group 2 34 Trigger commands TRIGGER 2 221 TRIGGER MAIN 2 222 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE 2 223 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE COU PLING 2 223 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SLOPE 2 224 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE 2 225 T
82. MENT MEAS lt x gt TYPE 2 164 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt UNITS 2 167 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt VALUE 2 168 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 2 164 Measurement specifier command mnemonic 2 10 MEASUREMENT 2 155 MEASUREMENT IMMED 2 156 MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 2 157 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE 2 158 MEASUREMENT IMMED UNITS 2 161 MEASUREMENT IMMED VAL UE 2 162 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt 2 163 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt TYPE 2 164 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt UNITS 2 167 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt VALUE 2 168 MEASUREMENT MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 2 164 Index 6 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index Message command 2 2 command terminator 2 8 handling 3 1 table of program messages 3 17 Miscellaneous command group 2 25 Miscellaneous commands AUTORANGE 2 52 AUTORANGE SETTINGS 2 54 AUTORANGE STATE 2 53 AUTOSET 2 55 AUTOSET ENABLE 2 55 AUTOSET SIGNAL 2 55 AUTOSET VIEW 2 56 DDT 2 93 FACTORY 2 107 HDR 2 132 HEADER 2 133 IDN 2 143 LANGUAGE 2 145 LOCK 2 145 LRN 2 146 REM 2 184 SET 2 197 TIME 2 220 TRG 2 221 UNLOCK 2 240 VERBOSE 2 241 Mnemonic command 2 3 Numeric command argument 2 11 Numeric argument coercion 2 11 0 OPC 2 169 3 14 Operation complete command 2 169 Operation complete wait 2 242 Output queue 3 6 P PictBridge command group 2 27 PictBridge commands PICTBRIDGE DATEPR
83. MMed VALue Might return 9 9E37 which means that the channel specified by MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce is not currently displayed ESR After a measurement query might return 16 indicating that there are error messages in the queue ALLEv Might return ALLEV 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude Related Commands ESR EVENT ALLEv MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Query Only Returns all measurement parameters for the displayed oscilloscope periodic measurement specified by lt x gt Where lt x gt identifies the measurement 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series and 1 through 5 for the TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Returns Settings for the specified measurement source Examples MEASUrement MEAS3 Might return PERIOD s CH1 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 163 Command Descriptions MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce Sets or queries the source for an automated measurement Where lt x gt identifies the measurement 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series and 1 through 5 for the TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series This is equivalent to selecting the measurement source in the MEASURE menu Group Measurement Syntax TDS200 TDS1000 and TDS2000 series MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce CH lt y gt TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt
84. PC WAI returns no value when pending operations finish Table 2 30 OPC on page 2 170 lists commands that generate an operation complete message Group Status and Error Syntax WAI Related Commands BUSY OPC WAVEFORMANALYSIS SOUrce TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 242 Sets or queries the Waveform Analysis source This command is equivalent to setting the Sources option in the Waveform Analysis menu Group Waveform Syntax WAVEFORMANALYSIS SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH WAVEFORMANALYSIS SOUrce TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 specifies channel 1 through 4 as the waveform analysis source NOTE The CH3 and CH4 options are only valid for instruments with four channels MATH specifies the math waveform as the analysis source Examples WAVEFORMANALYSIS SOUrce CH2 Specifies Channel 2 as the waveform analysis source WAVFrm Query Only Returns WFMPre and CURVe data for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command This command is equivalent to sending WFMPre CURVe If the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command is not displayed the oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission parameters BYT_Nr BIT_Nr ENCdg BN_Fmt BYT_Or Group Waveform Syntax WAVF rm Returns See WFMPre and CURVe commands Related Commands CURVe DATa SOUr
85. PCs SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs Table 2 29 lists DATa and WFMPre parameter settings Table 2 29 DATa and WFMPre parameter settings WFMPre settings DATa ENCdg setting ASCli RiBinary RPBinary TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Table 2 29 DATa and WFMPre parameter settings Cont DATa ENCdg setting SRibinary BIN RI LSB SRPbinary BIN RP LSB Examples DATa ENCdg RPBINARY Sets the data encoding format to be positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first DATa ENCdg Might return SRPBINARY for the format of the waveform data Related Commands WFMPre ENCdg WFMPre BN_Fmt WFMPre BYT_Or DATa SOUrce Sets or queries which waveform will be transferred from the oscilloscope by the CURVe WFMPre or WAVFrm queries You can transfer only one waveform at a time Group Waveform Syntax DATa SOUrce lt wfm gt DATa SOUrce Arguments lt wfm gt is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the external device Allowable values are CH lt x gt MATH and REF lt x gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 89 Command Descriptions Examples DATa SOUrce REFB Specifies th
86. PLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF CH4 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF HORIZONTAL VIEW MAIN MAIN SCALE 5 0E 4 POSITION 0 0E0 HORIZONTAL DELAY SCALE 5 0E 5 POSITION 0 0E0 TRIGGER MAIN MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE HOLDOFF VALUE 5 0E 7 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO SOURCE CH1 SYNC LINE POLARITY NORMAL LINE 1 STANDARD NTSC TRIGGER MAIN PULSE SOURCE CH1 WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN EQUAL WIDTH 1 0E 3 TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL 0 0E0 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer B 5 Appendix B Factory Setup SELECT CH1 1 CH2 0 CH3 0 CH4 O MATH O REFA 0 REFB O REFC O REFD 0 CURSOR FUNCTION OFF SELECT SOURCE CH1 CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 2 0E 3 POSITIONZ2 2 0E 3 CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 3 2E0 POSITION2 3 2E0 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS5 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD SOURCE CH1 MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 FFT HORIZONTAL POSITION 5 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 1 0E0 HARDCOPY lt BUTTON PRINTS gt FORMAT EPSON PORT CENTRONICS LAYOUT PORTRAIT INKSAVER ON lt SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT BMP gt LANGUAGE ENGLISH TDS210 and TDS220 Oscilloscopes Items enclosed in lt gt brackets are pr
87. PS2000 Series Only Returns the time or frequency difference between the two vertical bar cursors The units seconds or Hertz are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command If the cursor source is an FFT math waveform CURSor VBArs DELTa is always in Hertz regardless of the value set by CURSor VBArs UNIts The command is identical to the CURSor VBArs DELTa query It is included for compatibility with the TDS3000 series NOTE If Trigger View is active this query returns 9 9E37 and generates event 221 Settings conflict Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs HDELTa TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 79 Command Descriptions Returns lt NR3 gt Examples CURSor VBArs HDELTa Might return 8 92E 1 indicating that the time difference between the vertical bar cursors is 0 892 seconds CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Query Only TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 80 Returns the waveform amplitude at the specified cursor position The units are specified by the CURSor HBArs UNIts query Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Arguments lt x gt specifies the cursor Valid values are 1 and 2 Returns lt NR3 gt indicates the amplitude value at the selected position Examples CURSOR VBARS HPOS1 Might return 1 37 indicating the value of one vertical bar tic Related Commands CURSor HBArs UNIts TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000
88. Programmer Manual Tektronix 7 TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Digital Oscilloscopes 071 1075 04 This document supports e TPS2000 Series instruments any version e TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series instruments any version e TDS2CM or TDS2CMA any version when used in TDS1000 or TDS2000 Series instruments any version e TDS2MEM any version when used in most TDS1000 or TDS2000 Series instruments except TDS1001 and TDS2004 models any version e TDS2CM TDS2CMA or TDS2MM any version when used in a TDS224 instrument any version e TDS2CM or TDS2CMA version CMV v1 04 and above or TDS2MM any version when used in TDS210 and TDS220 instruments with FV v1 09 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc OpenChoice is a registered trademark of Tektronix Inc Tektronix is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash trademark PictBridge is a trademark of the Standard of Camera amp Imaging Products Association CIPA DC 0
89. Query Only NOTE You can use this command with a TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscope as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module Returns the current MATH FFT display settings Group Math Syntax MATH FFT Examples MATH FFT Might return the following MATH FFT HORIZONTAL POSITION 5 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 1 0E0 MATH FFT HORizontal POSition 2 150 NOTE You can use this command with a TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscope as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module Sets or queries the FFT math waveform horizontal position TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Math Syntax MATH FFT HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt MATH FFT HORizontal POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the point in the FFT waveform data record to display at the center vertical graticule line The data record point is a percentage of the total record length in the range of 0 to 100 The default value is 50 How much data is displayed depends on the FFT Zoom factor setting The oscilloscope rounds lt NR3 gt to the nearest workable value Examples MATH FFT HORizontal POSition 25 Sets the FFT waveform horizontal position such that the data at the 25 point of the record is centered on the display MATH FFT HORizontal POSition Mig
90. R1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets the source in the power menu Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics SOUrce CH lt x gt HARmonics SOUrce Arguments CH lt x gt is one of the allowable input channels The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments Examples HARmonics SOUrce CH1 Sets the source for the harmonics function to CH1 HARmonics SOUrce Might return CH1 indicating that the harmonics source is channel 1 HARmonics THDF Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns total harmonic distortion of the waveform as a percentage of the fundamental Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics THDF TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 131 Command Descriptions Returns lt NR3 gt Examples HARmonics THDF Might return 1 1117748204298E1 indicating that the total harmonic distortion is 11 11 of the fundamental frequency HARmonics THDR Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only HDR 2 132 Returns the total harmonic distortion of the waveform as a percentage of the Vims or Irms of the input signal Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics THDR Returns lt NR3 gt Examples HARmonics THDR Might return 1 1094271493299E1 indicating that the harmonic distortion is 11 09 of the RMS input voltage This command is id
91. RIGGER MAIN FREQUEN CY 2 226 TRIGGER MAIN HOLDOFF 2 227 TRIGGER MAIN HOLD OFF VALUE 2 227 TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL 2 228 TRIGGER MAIN MODE 2 228 TRIGGER MAIN PULSE 2 229 WIDTH 2 231 TRIGGER MAIN PULSE SOURCE 2 230 TRIGGER MAIN PULSE WIDTH POLARITY 2 231 WHEN 2 232 WIDTH 2 233 TRIGGER MAIN TYPE 2 233 TRIGGER MAIN VID EO FIELD 2 234 TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO LINE 2 235 TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO PO LARITY 2 235 TRIGGER MAIN VID EO SOURCE 2 236 2 238 TRIGGER MAIN VID EO STANDARD 2 237 TRIGGER STATE 2 239 TRIGGER MAIN 2 222 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE 2 223 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE COU PLING 2 223 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SLOPE 2 224 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE 2 225 TRIGGER MAIN FREQUENCY 2 226 TRIGGER MAIN HOLDOFF 2 227 TRIGGER MAIN HOLD OFF VALUE 2 227 TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL 2 228 TRIGGER MAIN MODE 2 228 TRIGGER MAIN PULSE 2 229 WIDTH 2 231 TRIGGER MAIN PULSE SOURCE 2 230 TRIGGER MAIN PULSE WIDTH POLARITY 2 231 WHEN 2 232 WIDTH 2 233 TRIGGER MAIN TYPE 2 233 TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO FIELD 2 234 Index 12 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO LINE 2 235 TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO PO LARITY 2 235 TRIGGER MAIN VID EO SOURCE 2 236 2 238 TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO STAN DARD 2 237 TRIGGER STATE 2 239 TST query 2 240 U UNLOCK 2 240 V VERBOSE 2 241 Vertical bar cursors 2 78 2 80 Vertical command group
92. RMINATED after indefinite response QYE bit 2 set normally caused by using a query that returns arbitrary data in a concatenated command Table 3 8 lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command execution These notify you that you may get unexpected results Table 3 8 Execution warning messages EXE Bit 4 Code 500 510 525 526 527 528 530 531 532 540 541 542 543 Message Execution warning String data too long truncated Parameter underrange Parameter overrange Parameter rounded Parameter out of range Data start gt stop Values swapped internally Data stop gt record length Curve truncated Curve data too long Curve truncated Measurement warning Measurement warning Low signal amplitude Measurement warning Unstable histogram Measurement warning Low resolution TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 23 Status and Events Table 3 8 Execution warning messages EXE Bit 4 Cont Code Message 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 545 Measurement warning Invalid in minmax 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 Measurement warning Clipping positive 549 Measurement warning Clipping negative Table 3 9 lists internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the oscilloscope Table 3 9 Internal warning messages Message Internal warning 3 24 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS
93. Re wheeled ah abe 2 22 Measurement Commands 0 00 0 eee sene e ee eon 2 23 Miscellaneous Commands 0000 e cece eee eens 2 25 PictBridge Commands TDS1000B and TDS2000B Only 2 27 Power and Battery Related Commands TPS2000 Only 2 28 Power Measurement TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application Key Installed Only 2 28 RS 232 Commands 0 0 e cece eee cence neces 2 32 Save and Recall Commands 0 0 0 cece eee ees 2 32 Status and Error Commands 0 000 e cence ees 2 33 Trigger Commands 2 3 een clid cor ek gh aia e E E da 2 34 Vertical Commands 25 s2sdee cnz dee gow i459 a e E a al aos 2 36 Waveform Commands 0 cece eee eee ne eens 2 37 Waveform Data Formats 0 c cece cee eee e eee 2 40 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer i Table of Contents Waveform Data Record 0 0 cece eee eee eee 2 42 Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation 2 42 Waveform Preamble 0 eee eee eee ee eens 2 43 Scaling Waveform Data 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee eee 2 43 Transferring Waveform Data 0 000000 eee 2 43 Command Descriptions ccc cece cree cee eee 2 45 Status and Events Status and Events 0 eee e cece creer cece eens 3 1 REBIStEIS 2 4 4 wip E T EEE T EE eta deie ane thes 3 1 Status Registers osae hna PERE EERE OOE 3 1 Enable Registers erano taia na
94. S200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 139 Command Descriptions HORizontal RECOrdlength Query Only Returns the number of acquisition data points For TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscopes this value is always 2500 even in FFT mode This command is provided to maintain program compatibility with other Tektronix digital oscilloscopes Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal RECOrdlength Returns 2500 Examples HORi zontal RECOrdlength Returns 2500 as the number of data points in each record Related Commands WFMPre NR_Pt WFMPre lt wfm gt NR_Pt HORizontal SCAle Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the HORizontal MAIn SCAle command It is included for compati bility purposes HORizontal SECdiv Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the HORizontal MAIn SCAle command It is included for compati bility purposes 2 140 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions HORizontal VIEW Specifies whether the horizontal display uses the Main Window Zone or Window view This is equivalent to setting the View in the Horizontal menu Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal VIEW MAIn WINDOW ZONE HORi zontal VIEW Arguments MAIn specifies that the waveform is acquired and displayed using the Main time base WINDOW specifies that the waveform is a
95. S2000 only AUTORange STATE Set or query the autorange to on or off TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only AUTOSet Automatic oscilloscope setup AUTOSet ENABLE Allows educators to disable or enable the TDS1000B and TDS2000B only Autorange and Autoset functions TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 25 Command Groups 2 26 Table 2 17 Miscellaneous commands Cont Header AUTOSet SIGNAL TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Description Return the type of signal found by autoset AUTOSet VIEW TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only DATE TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only DDT Set or query the Autoset view Set or query the date value Set or query the group execute trigger GET FACtory Reset to factory default HDR Same as HEADer HEADer Set or query the command header ID Return identification information IDN Return identification information LANGUAGE Set or query the language for display messages LOCk Lock front panel local lockout LRN Query device settings REM No action remark only RST Reset SET Same as LRN TIME Set or query the time value TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only TRG TST Perform Group Execute Trigger GET Return self test results TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 17 Miscellaneous commands Cont
96. S2PWRI1 Power Analysis Application User Manual an optional accessory available in eleven languages Language TDS2PWRi1 user manual part number English 071 1452 XX French 071 1453 XX Italian 071 1454 XX German 071 1455 XX Spanish 071 1456 XX Japanese 071 1457 XX Portuguese 071 1458 XX Simplified Chinese 071 1459 XX Traditional Chinese 071 1460 XX Korean 071 1461 XX Russian 071 1462 XX TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Manuals For general operation refer to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope User Manual a standard accessory Language TDS1000B TDS2000B user manual part number English 071 1817 XX French 071 1818 XX Italian 071 1819 XX German 071 1820 XX Spanish 071 1821 XX Japanese 071 1822 XX Portuguese 071 1823 XX Simplified Chinese 071 1824 XX viii TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Preface Traditional Chinese 071 1825 XX 071 1826 XX 071 1827 XX Korean Russian TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Manuals For general operation and information on the TDS2CMA Commu nications module refer to the TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope User Manual a standard accessory Language TDS1000 TDS2000 user manual part number English 071 1064 XX French 071 1065 XX Italian 071 1066 XX German 071 1067 XX Spanish 071 1068 XX Japanese 071 1069 XX Portuguese 071 1070 XX Simplified Chinese 071 1071 XX Traditional Chinese 071 10
97. SOUrce CH lt y gt MATH MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce Arguments CH lt y gt specifies the input channel source for the measurement MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math waveform TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only Examples MEASUrement MEAS2 SOUrce CH1 Sets the source for Measurement 2 to channel 1 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe 2 164 Sets or queries the on screen periodic oscilloscope measurement type for the measurement specified by lt x gt Where lt x gt identifies the measurement 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series and 1 through 5 for the TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions This is equivalent to selecting the measurement type in the MEASURE menu Setting the type to anything other than NONE displays the MEASURE menu on the screen NOTE You should use the MEASUrement IMMed command with programming to take measurements as this is preferred to the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt command Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe FREQuency MEAN PERIod PK2pk CRMs MINImum MAXImum RISe FALL PWIdth NWIdth NONe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Arguments FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform PERIod is the duration in seconds of the first compl
98. SOUrces TPS2000 Series Only 2 180 Sets or queries the Power Analysis sources This command is equivalent to setting the Sources option in the Power Analysis menu It does not affect the sources for any customer visible PI measure ments Group Power Measurement Syntax POWerANALYSIS SOUrces CH1CH2 CH3CH4 POWerANALYSIS SOUrces Arguments CH1CH2 selects Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the power analysis source CH3CH4 selects Channel 3 and Channel 4 as the power analysis source NOTE The CH3CH4 argument is only valid for instruments with four channels Examples POWerANALYSIS SOUrces CH1CH2 Specifies Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the power analysis source POWerANALYSIS SOUrces Might return CH1CH2 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions PSC Sets and queries the power on status flag that controls the automatic power on handling of the DESER SRER and ESER registers When PSC is true the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power on When PSC is false the current values in the DESER SRER and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are restored at power on Refer to the Status and Events chapter on page 3 1 for more information Group Status and Error Syntax PSC lt NR1 gt PSC Arguments lt NR1 gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false disables the
99. SS LOG INDEX 2 207 SWLOSS LOG TOTAL 2 208 SWLOSS LOG TURNOFF 2 209 SWLOSS LOG TURNON 2 210 SWLOSS SAVE 2 211 SWLOSS SOURCES 2 211 SWLOSS STOPAFTER 2 212 SWLOSS TOFFEND 2 213 SWLOSS TOFFSTART 2 215 SWLOSS TONEND 2 214 SWLOSS TONSTART 2 215 SWLOSS UNITS 2 216 SWLOSS VALUE CONDUC TION 2 217 SWLOSS VALUE TOTAL 2 218 SWLOSS VALUE TURNOFF 2 218 SWLOSS VALUE TURNON 2 219 SWLOSS VSAT 2 220 POWER 2 176 POWER AC PRESENT 2 176 POWER BATTERIES TIME 2 178 POWER BATTERY lt x gt GAS GAUGE 2 177 POWER BATTERY lt x gt STA TUS 2 178 POWER BUTTONLIGHT 2 179 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index Power on status clear command 2 181 POWERANALYSIS SOURCES 2 180 Preamble waveform 2 43 Programming examples 4 1 Programming examples 4 1 PSC 2 181 PSC command 3 6 Q Query header in query response 2 133 2 241 Query command 2 2 definition 2 4 Queue event 3 7 event handling sequence 3 8 output 3 6 Quoted string command argument 2 12 Quoted string examples 2 13 Quoted string rules 2 12 R RCL 2 182 Recall setting command 2 182 RECALL SETUP 2 182 RECALL WAVEFORM 2 183 REF lt x gt command mnemonic 2 9 Reference waveform command mnemonic 2 9 Register DESER 2 94 2 181 3 4 ESER 2 103 2 181 3 5 SBR 2 199 3 3 SESR 2 71 2 104 2 169 3 2 SRER 2 181 2 198 3 5 REM 2 184 Reset command 2 190 to factory s
100. ST 2 190 ALLEV 2 51 BUSY 2 57 CLS 2 71 DESE 2 94 3 5 ESE 2 103 3 5 ESR 2 104 3 2 EVENT 2 105 EVMSG 2 105 EVQTY 2 106 ID 2 141 OPC 2 169 PSC 2 181 3 6 SRE 2 198 3 5 STB 2 199 3 3 TST 2 240 WAI 2 242 STB 2 199 STB query 3 3 SWLOSS 2 200 SWLOSS ACQUIRE 2 200 SWLOSS AVERAGE CONDUC TION 2 201 SWLOSS AVERAGE N 2 202 SWLOSS AVERAGE TOTAL 2 203 SWLOSS AVERAGE TURNOFF 2 203 SWLOSS AVERAGE TURNON 2 204 SWLOSS ENABLE 2 205 SWLOSS LEVELS 2 206 SWLOSS LOG CONDUCTION 2 206 SWLOSS LOG INDEX 2 207 SWLOSS LOG TOTAL 2 208 SWLOSS LOG TURNOFF 2 209 SWLOSS LOG TURNON 2 210 SWLOSS SAVE 2 211 SWLOSS SOURCES 2 211 SWLOSS STOPAFTER 2 212 Index 10 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index SWLOSS TOFFEND 2 213 SWLOSS TOFFSTART 2 215 SWLOSS TONEND 2 214 SWLOSS TONSTART 2 215 SWLOSS UNITS 2 216 SWLOSS VALUE CONDUC TION 2 217 SWLOSS VALUE TOTAL 2 218 SWLOSS VALUE TURNOFF 2 218 SWLOSS VALUE TURNON 2 219 SWLOSS VSAT 2 220 Synchronizing commands 3 10 Syntax BNF Backus Naur form 2 2 command 2 1 T Table programming message 3 17 TDS1001 model xi TDS2004 model xi TDS2CM communications module see TDS2CMA xi TDS2CMA communications mod ule where to find installation information 1 1 TDS2MEM related commands DATE 2 93 FILESYSTEM 2 108 FILESYSTEM CwWD 2 109 FILESYSTEM DELETE 2 110 FILESYSTE
101. TEM RENAME 2 114 FILESystem RMDIR 2 115 G GPIB EOM end of message 2 8 H Hard copy command group 2 20 Hard copy commands HARDCOPY 2 116 HARDCOPY BUTTON 2 117 HARDCOPY FORMAT 2 118 HARDCOPY INKSAVER 2 120 HARDCOPY LAYOUT 2 121 HARDCOPY PORT 2 122 HARDCOPY 2 116 HARDCOPY BUTTON 2 117 HARDCOPY FORMAT 2 118 HARDCOPY INKSAVER 2 120 HARDCOPY LAY OUT 2 121 HARDCOPY PORT 2 122 HARMONICS 2 123 HARMONICS ENABLE 2 124 HARMONICS FREQUENCY 2 124 HARMONICS HRMS 2 125 Index 4 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index HARMONICS PERCENT 2 126 HARMONICS PHASE 2 126 HARMONICS RMS 2 127 HARMONICS SAVE 2 127 HARMONICS SELECT 2 128 HARMONICS SETUP 2 129 HARMONICS SHOW 2 130 HARMONICS SOURCE 2 131 HARMONICS THDF 2 131 HARMONICS THDR 2 132 HDR 2 132 HEADER 2 133 Header command 2 3 2 133 included in query response 2 133 2 241 Headers in query responses 2 5 Horizontal command group 2 21 Horizontal commands HORIZONTAL 2 134 HORIZONTAL DELAY 2 134 HORIZONTAL DELAY POSI TION 2 135 2 137 2 139 HORIZONTAL DELAY SCALE 2 136 HORIZONTAL DELAY SEC DIV 2 137 HORIZONTAL MAIN 2 137 HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 138 HORIZONTAL MAIN SECDIV 2 139 HORIZONTAL RECORD LENGTH 2 140 HORIZONTAL SCALE 2 140 HORIZONTAL SECDIV 2 140 HORIZONTAL TRIG GER POSITION 2 141 HORIZONTAL 2 134 HORIZONTAL DELAY 2 134 HORIZONTAL DELAY POSI TION 2 135
102. TYPe Set or query the immediate measure ment to be taken MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Return the immediate measurement units MEASUrement IMMed VALue Return the immediate measurement result MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Return parameters on the periodic measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce Set or query the channel to take the periodic measurement from MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Set or query the type of periodic mea surement to be taken TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 16 Measurement commands Cont Description MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Return the units for periodic measure ment MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Return periodic measurement results Miscellaneous Commands Miscellaneous commands are a group of commands that do not fit into any other category Several commands and queries are common to all 488 2 1987 devices on the GPIB or USB bus and the device on the RS 232 interface These commands and queries are defined by IEEE Std 488 2 1987 and Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats 1989 and begin with an asterisk character Table 2 17 lists and describes Miscellaneous commands Table 2 17 Miscellaneous commands Header Description AUTORange Return all autorange parameters TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only AUTORange SETTings Set or query the which parameters TDS1000B TDS2000B and autorange can adjust TP
103. This is a typical response for 2 channel models sHEADER 1 VERBOSE 1 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DESTINATION REFA SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 2500 WIDTH 1 LOCK NONE DISPLAY FORMAT YT STYLE VECTORS PERSISTENCE O BRIGHTNESS 30 CONTRAST 50 INVERT OFF sACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE NUMAVG 16 STATE 1 STOPAFTER RUNSTOP CH1 PROBE 1 0E1 CURRENTPROBE 1 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF YUNIT V CH2 PROBE 1 0E1 CURRENTPROBE 1 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF INVERT OFF YUNIT V sHORIZONTAL VIEW MAIN MAIN SCALE 5 0E 4 POSITION 0 0E0 HORIZONTAL DELAY SCALE 5 0E 5 POSITION 0 0E0 TRIGGER MAIN MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE HOLDOFF VALUE 5 0E 7 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO SOURCE CH1 SYNC LINE POLARITY NORMAL LINE 1 STANDARD NTSC TRIGGER MAIN PULSE SOURCE CH1 WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN EQUAL WIDTH 1 0E 3 TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL 0 0E0 SELECT CH1 1 CH2 0 MATH O REFA 0 REFB 0 CURSOR FUNCTION OFF SELECT SOURCE CH1 CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITIONI 2 0E 3 POSITION2 2 0E 3 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer B 3 Appendix B Factory Setup CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 3 2E0 POSITION2 3 2E0 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS5 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUR
104. U010114 TEKTRONIX TDS 1012B CU010114 CF 91 1CT FV v21 21 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Related Commands ID LANGuage LOCk Sets or queries the languages that the oscilloscope uses to display information on the screen This is equivalent to setting the Language option in the Utility menu Group Miscellaneous Syntax LANGuage ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian SPANish JAPAnese PORTUguese KOREan TRADitionalchinese SIMP1ifiedchinese LANGuage Arguments Specifies the language used to display oscilloscope information on the screen Examples LANGuage FRENch Specifies that the oscilloscope displays information in French LANGuage Might return SPANISH Enables and disables all front panel buttons and knobs There is no front panel equivalent Group Miscellaneous TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 145 Command Descriptions Syntax LOCk ALL NONe LOCk Arguments ALL disables all front panel controls NONe enables all front panel controls This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL command Examples LOCk ALL Locks the front panel controls LOCk Returns NONE when the front panel controls are enabled by this command Related Commands UNLock LRN Query Only This is identical to the SET query described on page 2 197 Group Miscellaneous Syntax LRN MATH Query Only Returns the d
105. US 2 62 CLS 2 71 communications modules refer ences to Xi Concatenating command 2 6 Configuration command query 2 143 Conventions xi Cursor command group 2 17 Cursor commands CURSOR 2 72 CURSOR FUNCTION 2 73 CURSOR HBARS 2 74 CURSOR HBARS DELTA 2 74 CURSOR HBARS POSI TION lt x gt 2 75 CURSOR HBARS UNITS 2 76 Index 2 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index CURSOR SELECT SOURCE 2 77 CURSOR VBARS 2 78 CURSOR VBARS DELTA 2 78 CURSOR VBARS HDELTA 2 79 CURSOR VBARS HPOS lt x gt 2 80 CURSOR VBARS POSI TION lt x gt 2 81 CURSOR VBARS SLOPE 2 82 CURSOR VBARS UNITS 2 82 CURSOR VBARS VDELTA 2 83 CURSOR 2 72 CURSOR FUNCTION 2 73 CURSOR HBARS 2 74 CURSOR HBARS DELTA 2 74 CURSOR HBARS POSITION lt x gt 2 75 CURSOR HBARS UNITS 2 76 CURSOR SELECT SOURCE 2 77 CURSOR VBARS 2 78 CURSOR VBARS DELTA 2 78 CURSOR VBARS HDELTA 2 79 CURSOR VBARS HPOS lt x gt 2 80 CURSOR VBARS POSITION lt x gt 2 81 CURSOR VBARS SLOPE 2 82 CURSOR VBARS UNITS 2 82 CURSOR VBARS VDELTA 2 83 CURVE 2 84 D DATA 2 85 DATA DESTINATION 2 86 DATA ENCDG 2 87 DATA SOURCE 2 89 DATA START 2 90 DATA STOP 2 91 DATA TARGET 2 92 DATA WIDTH 2 92 DATE 2 93 DCL 2 5 3 7 DDT 2 93 DESE command 2 94 3 5 DESER register 2 94 2 181 3 4 Device clear 2 5 DIAG RESULT FLAG 2 96 DIAG RESULT LOG 2 96 Display command group 2
106. V div setting of channel 2 is 1 V div Related Commands CH1 VOLts CH lt x gt VOLts Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments This command is identical to the CH lt x gt SCAle command and is included for compatibility purposes Only CH lt x gt SCAle is returned in response to a CH lt x gt query 2 70 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions CH lt x gt YUNit TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the units of the specified channel The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt YUNit lt QString gt CH lt x gt YUNit Arguments lt QString gt is either V for volts or A for amps This is equivalent to setting the probe to Voltage or Current in the probe front panel menu This command is case insensitive Examples CH2 YUNIT Might return CH2 YUNIT V indicating that the channel 2 units are volts CLS Set Only The CLS command clears the following oscilloscope status data structures m The Event Queue m The Standard Event Status Register SESR m The Status Byte Register except the MAV bit described on page 2 72 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 71 Command
107. VSAT command NOTE This command returns error 221 settings conflict if the Switching Loss menu is not active Group Power Measurement TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 201 Command Descriptions Syntax SWLoss AVErage CONDUCTION Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss AVErage CONDUCTION Might return 6 0880498608E 2 SWLoss AVErage N Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 202 Returns the number of measurements used to calculate the AVG averaged measurement value for switching loss measurements NOTE This command returns error 221 settings conflict if the Switching Loss menu is not active Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss AVErage N Returns lt NR1 gt Examples SWLoss AVErage N Might return 185 indicating that the oscilloscope used 185 measurements to calculate the average TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SWLoss AVErage TOTAL Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the sum of the Turn On Turn Off and Conduction switching losses The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg column of the Switching Loss display NOTE This command returns error 221 settings conflict if the Switching Loss menu is not active Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss AVErage TOTAL Returns lt NR3 gt Exam
108. actory rem Set the scope parameters that differ from the defaults chl volts 2 0 hor main scale 100e 6 trig main level 2 4 vVvvyv TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 4 1 Programming Example rem Start a single sequence acquisition acquire stopafter sequence acquire state on rem Wait for the acquisition to complete rem Note your controller program time out must be set long enough to handle the wait gt opc 1 VvVvvvyv gt rem Use the oscilloscope built in measurements to measure the waveform you acquired gt measu immed type mean gt measu immed value MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 2 4631931782E0 gt rem Be sure to use the esr query to check for measurement errors gt measu immed type freq gt Measu immed value MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 9 9E37 gt esr 16 gt allev ALLEV 2202 Measurement error No period found gt rem Query out the waveform points for later analysis on your controller computer gt data encdg ascii gt curve CURVE 7 6 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 gt rem Query out the parameters used for caculating the times and voltages of the waveform points gt wfmpre WFMPRE BYT_NR 1 BIT_NR 8 ENCDG ASC BN_FMT RP BYT_OR MSB NR PT 2500 4 2 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Appendices aw Appendix A ASCII Code Chart Continued on next page TDS200 TDS1000
109. alculate the seconds division or Hertz division units shown in the status bar and cursor readouts when displaying a reference waveform The query form returns the interval between samples of the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command if that waveform is active or displayed If that waveform is inactive or not displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244 waveform requested is not active NOTE For waveform records acquired in Peak Detect mode even though there is a pair of samples for each conceptual time period the XINcr is such that XINcr recl the total time over which the data was collected TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre XINcr lt NR3 gt WFMPre XINcr Arguments lt NR3 gt is the interval between points in the waveform record in the units specified by WFMPre XUNit Note that at some fast sweeps some points in the waveform record are produced by interpolation Examples DATa SOUrce CH1 WFMPre XINcr Might return WFMPRE XINCR 2 0E 6 WFMPre XUNit For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS200 series with a TDS2CMA communications module the set form of this command specifies the horizontal units s for seconds and Hz for Hertz for the reference waveform specified by the DATa DES Tination command Setting a reference waveform to Hz causes the oscil
110. ample seconds with dB or Hertz with volts The oscilloscope will not warn you of this condition The oscilloscope uses WFMPre XU Nit to determine whether the waveform is a YT or an FFT For TDS200 oscilloscopes used with a TDS2CMA communications or a TDS2MM measurement module the set form is ignored Refer to the WFMPre YMUIt command for equivalent functionality The query form returns the vertical units of the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command if that waveform is active or displayed If that waveform is not active or displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244 waveform requested is not active Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre YUNit lt qstring gt WFMPre YUNit Arguments lt qstring gt is Volts U or dB The TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series have the following additional arguments A for amps VA for volt amps TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 257 Command Descriptions AA for amps amps VV for volts volts Returns lt QString gt returns the following Volts for volts U for unknown units divisions dB for decibels for unknown mask waveforms units For the TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series lt QString gt can return the following A for amps VA for volts amps AA for amps amps VV for volts volts WFMPre YZEro 2 258 For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS210 or TDS2
111. ary file and therefore does not use linefeeds hexadecimal Oa as a terminator There are two ways to work around this limitation m Write your controller program to use the byte count information in the BMP file header m Set your RS232 program s time out value to a large enough value to guarantee that the program does not time out before complet ing the data transfer For example to transfer an 80 kB file at 9600 baud set the transfer program time out to 300 seconds GPIb specifies that the hard copy data is sent to the GPIB port This argument is available on instruments with a TDS2CM TDSCMA TDSCMAX or TDSMM module installed USB specifies that the hard copy data is sent to the USB Device port on the back of a TDS1000B or TDS2000B series oscilloscope only Examples HARDCopy PORT Might return RS232 as the selected hard copy output port HARmonics Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns settings for the HARmonic commands Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 123 Command Descriptions Examples HARmonics Might return HARMONICS ENABLE ON SETUP AUTOMATIC SHOW ALL SELECT 1 SOURCE CH1 indicating that the oscilloscope is acquiring and showing all harmonics and measuring the first harmonic from channel 1 HARmonics ENABle TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Turns the harm
112. as the horizontal scale vertical scale and other settings in place when the waveform was created Refer to the WFMPre commands on page 2 244 for more information about the waveform preamble Scaling Waveform Data Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller you can convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform preamble Transferring Waveform Data Data transfer times depend on data format data width and the speed of the controller Refer to Programming Examples on page 4 1 From the Oscilloscope To transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to an external controller follow these steps 1 Use the DATa SOUrce command to select the waveform source 2 Use the DATa ENCdg command to specify the waveform data format 3 Use the DATa WIDth command to specify the number of bytes per data point 4 Use the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands to specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer 5 Use the WFMPRe command to transfer waveform preamble information 6 Use the CURVe command to transfer waveform data TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 43 Command Groups To the Oscilloscope To transfer waveform data to an oscilloscope waveform storage location follow these steps 1 Use the DATa DESTination command to specify the stored waveform location 2 Use the DATa ENCdg command to specify the waveform data format 3 Use
113. at reference waveform REFB will be transferred in the next CURVe query DATa SOUrce Might return REFA indicating the source for the waveform data that is transferred using the CURVe command Related Commands CURVe WFMPre WAVFrm DATa STARt 2 90 Sets or queries the starting data point for waveform data transfers This command lets you transfer partial waveforms to and from the oscilloscope Group Waveform Syntax DATa STARt lt NR1 gt DATa STARt Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer value that ranges from 1 to 2500 and specifies the first data point that will be transferred Data is transferred from lt NR1 gt to DATa STOP or 2500 whichever is less When DATa STOP is less than DATa STARt the values are swapped internally for CURVe Examples DATa STARt 10 Specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10 DATa STARt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Might return 214 as the first waveform data point that will be transferred Related Commands CURVe DATa STOP Sets or queries the last data point in the waveform that will be transferred when executing the CURVe command This lets you transfer partial waveforms from the oscilloscope When using the CURVe command the oscilloscope stops reading data when there is no more data to read or when the 2500 data point limit is reached Group Waveform Syntax DATa STOP lt NR1 gt
114. ata is included in the file m Harmonics 1 through 50 m Magnitude m Percent of fundamental TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 127 Command Descriptions m Frequency m Phase angle NOTE You can view the contents of the saved file on your personal computer You cannot recall saved harmonics files to the oscillo scope Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics SAVe lt file path gt Arguments lt file path gt specifies the full path to save harmonic measurement data Examples HARmonics SAVe A datal CSv Specifies the file name and path to save harmonic loss measurement data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card HARmonics SELect TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 128 Selects an individual harmonic If the harmonics function is enabled but the requested harmonic is not currently on the screen the oscilloscope will put it on the screen If the harmonics function is not enabled the oscilloscope will remember the requested value but will not enable the harmonics function Group Power Measurement TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax HARmonics SELect lt NR1 gt HARmonics SELect Arguments lt NR1 gt specifies the harmonic from 1 to 50 Examples HARmonics SELect 1 Instructs the oscilloscope to select the first harmonic HARmonics SELect Might return 3 indicating that the third harmoni
115. ation Table 2 2 BNF notation Symbol Meaning lt gt Defined element Is defined as Exclusive OR Group one element is required Optional can be omitted Previous element s may be repeated Comment Command and Query Structure 2 2 Commands consist of set commands and query commands usually simply called commands and queries Commands change oscillo scope settings or perform a specific action Queries cause the oscilloscope to return data and information about its status Most commands have both a set form and a query form The query form of the command is the same as the set form except that it ends with a question mark For example the set command ACQuire MODe has a query form ACQuire MODe Not all commands have both a set and a query form some commands are set only and some are query only A few commands do both a set and query action For example the CAL command runs a self calibration program on the oscilloscope then returns the result of the calibration A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query Command messages consist of five different element types TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Syntax Table 2 3 lists and describes the five element types Table 2 3 Command message elements Symbol lt Header gt Meaning The basic command name If the header end
116. ave Recall Setup menu Group Save and Recall Syntax SAV lt NR1 gt Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 TDS200 series or from 1 to 10 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series and specifies a memory location Any settings that have been stored previously at this location are overwritten Examples SAV 2 Saves the current settings in memory location 2 Related Commands FACtory RCL RECAII SETUp SAVe SETUp TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 191 Command Descriptions SAVe IMAge Set Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 192 Saves the screen image to a file on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe IMAge lt file path gt Arguments lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the screen image file to save Use file name extensions that are appropriate for image format If you do not specify a path to a folder the oscilloscope saves the screen image file in the current working folder using the current save image file format The current folder refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query Use the SAVe IMAge FILEFormat command to set the screen image graphical file format Examples SAVe IMAge A PROD TST VID EVAL BMP Saves the screen i
117. between 90 and 10 of the first falling edge of the waveform Falling edge must be displayed to measure The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10 and 90 measure ment points TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 159 Command Descriptions 2 160 PWIdth TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the positive pulse width between the first rising edge and the next falling edge at the waveform 50 level Rising and falling edges must be displayed to measure The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 50 measurement point NWIdth TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the negative pulse width between the first falling edge and the next rising edge at the waveform 50 level Falling and rising edges must be displayed to measure The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 50 measurement point WFCREST TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the measurement of the maximum value to the cycle RMS value of the waveform a unit less ratio WFFREQ TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the measurement of frequency using the min max high low method WFCYCRMS TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only is the measurement of RMS voltage calculated over the first cycle using the min max high low method
118. ble Register DESER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read using DESE PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Write using DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read using ESR PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Cannot be written G 3 Event Status Enable Register ESER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read using ESE PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Write using ESE C J Byte Output D Byte Queue Byte Status Byte Register y i 6 SBR 7 RQSi5 4 3 2 f 0 Read using STB 16 ESB MAV Cannot be written MSS O C Service Request Enable Register SRER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read using SRE ESB MAV Write using SRE Figure 3 6 Status and event handling process TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 9 Status and Events Synchronization Methods Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received by the oscilloscope some commands start a process that requires more time For example once a HARDCOPY START command is executed it may be a few seconds before the hardcopy operation is complete Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process the oscilloscope continues processing other c
119. ble Registers Status Registers The Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR record certain types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these registers Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event such as an execution error or service request When an event of a given type occurs the oscilloscope sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero For more information refer to the Enable Registers section on page 3 4 Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 1 Status and Events The Standard Event Status Register SESR The SESR shown in Figure 3 1 records eight types of events that can occur within the oscilloscope Use ESR to read the SESR register Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new events Figure 3 1 shows SESR bit functions PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 1 The Standard Event Status Register SESR Table 3 1 lists and describes SESR bit functions Table 3 1 SESR bit functions Bit 7 MSB 6 5 Function PON Power On Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on URQ User Request Not used CME
120. c is selected Related Commands HARmonics 5SHOW HARmonics SETUp TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries the operating mode of harmonics measurements Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics SETUp MANUAL AUTOMATIC HARmonics SETUp Arguments MANUAL The oscilloscope does not adjust the setup when entering or exiting the harmonics measurement mode AUTOMATIC The oscilloscope adjusts various settings to optimize the harmonics display The oscilloscope returns to your previous settings when you exit the harmonics measurement mode TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 129 Command Descriptions Examples HARmonics SETUp Might return AUTOMATIC HARmonics SHOW TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 130 Sets or returns the type of displayed harmonics Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics SHOW ALL ODD EVEN HARmonics SHOW Arguments ALL displays both odd and even harmonics ODD displays odd harmonics only EVEN displays even harmonics only Examples HARmonics SHOW ALL Instructs the oscilloscope to display all harmonics HARmonics SHOW Might return HARMONICS SHOW ODD indicating that instrument displays only the odd harmonics Related Commands HARmonics SELect TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions HARmonics SOUrce TPS2000 Series with TPS2PW
121. ce Arguments CH lt x gt specifies one of the allowable input channels The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments EXT specifies the external input not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes EXT5 specifies that the external input is attenuated by a factor of 5 not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes EXT10 specifies that the external input is attenuated by a factor of 10 TPS2000 series only AC LINE specifies the power line signal as a trigger source not available with TPS2000 series oscilloscopes TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 225 Command Descriptions Examples TRIGger MAIn EDGE SOUrce CH1 Specifies channel 1 as the edge trigger source TRIGger MAIn EDGE SOUrce Might return CH2 for the edge trigger source TRIGger MAIn FREQuency Query Only TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 226 Returns the edge or pulse width trigger frequency This is the same as the readout in the lower right corner of the screen If the trigger frequency is less than 10 Hz the query returns 9 9e37 and generates error 2207 Measurement error Measurement overflow If the trigger type is video the query returns 9 9e37 and generates event 221 Settings conflict Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn FREQuency Returns Edge or pulse width trigger frequency Examples TRIGger MAIn FREQu
122. ce WFMPre TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 243 Command Descriptions WFMPre Query Only Returns waveform transmission and formatting settings for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command If the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command is not displayed the oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission parameters BYT_Nr BIT_Nr ENCdg BN_Fmt BYT_Or Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre Returns The format of the response when the DATa SOUrce waveform is activated is BYT_NR lt NR1 gt BIT_NR lt NR1 gt ENCDG ASC BIN BN FMT RI RP BYT_OR LSB MSB NR_PT lt NR1 gt WFID lt QSTRING gt PT FMT ENV Y 3XINCR lt NR3 gt PT OFF lt NR1 gt XZERO lt NR3 gt 3XUNIT lt QSTRING gt YMULT lt NR3 gt YZERO lt NR3 gt YOFF lt NR3 gt YUNIT lt QSTRING gt Related Commands WAVFrm WFMPre BIT_Nr 2 244 Sets or queries the number of bits per waveform point for the waveform to be transferred Changing the value of WFMPre BIT_Nr also changes the values of WFMPRe BYT_Nr and DATa WIDth Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre BIT Nr lt NR1 gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions WFMPre BIT Nr Arguments lt NR1 gt is either 8 or 16 and is equivalent to WFMPre BYT_Nr 8 and DATa WIDth 8 Examples WFMPre BIT Nr Might return 8 indicating that there are 8 bits per waveform point Related Comman
123. ce waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 WFMPre lt wfm gt YZEro Same as WFMPre YZEro except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a reference waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 263 Command Descriptions 2 264 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events SS Aas Status and Events The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB RS 232 and USB interfaces This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the oscilloscope The oscilloscope status reporting system consists of five 8 bit registers and two queues This section describes these registers and components and explains how the event handling system operates Registers The registers in the event reporting system fall into two functional groups m The Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR contain information about the status of the oscilloscope These registers are the Status Registers m The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Service Request Enable Register SRER determine whether selected types of events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue These three registers are the Ena
124. cquired and displayed using the Window delay time base ZONE is the same as MAIn but adds display of vertical cursor bars to show the portion of the waveform that would be acquired and displayed using the window delay time base Examples HORizontal VIEW MAIn specifies the default horizontal view ID Query Only Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and its firmware in Tektronix Codes and Formats notation NOTE ID must be the last command when part of a concatenated statement Otherwise the oscilloscope generates event message 440 The ID and IDN responses are slightly different TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 141 Command Descriptions 2 142 Group Status and Events Syntax ID Returns Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2CM TDS2CMA and TDS2MM modules ID TEK lt model number gt CF 91 1CT FV v lt oscilloscope firmware version number gt TDS2XX XXV v lt module firmware version number gt Where XX is the module type CM TDS2CM or TDS2CMA communications module or MM measurement module Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2MEM modules ID TEK lt model number gt CF 91 1CT TDS2MEM FV v lt module firmware version number gt Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TPS2000 oscilloscopes ID TEK lt model number gt CF 91 1CT FV v lt oscilloscope
125. d USB only and are summarized by the Master Status Summary MSS bit Use the SRE command to set the SRER Use the SRE query to read it The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read by a Serial Poll GPIB and USB only or the MSS bit changes back to a zero Figure 3 5 shows the SRER bit functions 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESB MV Figure 3 5 The Service Request Enable Register SRER TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 5 Status and Events The Enable Registers and the PSC Command The PSC command controls the contents of the Enable Registers at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows m DESER 255 equivalent to a DESe 255 command m ESER 0 equivalent to an ESE 0 command m SRER 0 equivalent to an SRE 0 command Sending PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile memory through a power cycle NOTE To enable the PON Power On event to generate a Service Request GPIB and USB only send PSC 0 use the DESe and ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER and use the SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER Subsequent power on cycles will generate a Service Request GPIB and USB only Queues The oscilloscope status and event reporting system contains two queues the Output Queue and the Event Queue The Output Queue The O
126. d from the Horizontal menu Group Horizontal Syntax HORi zontal MAIn SCAle lt NR3 gt HORi zontal MAIn SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the time per division The range depends on the oscillo scope model The acceptable values are in a 1 2 5 5 sequence Other values are forced to the closest acceptable value Examples HORizontal MAIn SCAle 2 5E 6 Sets the main scale to 2 5 us per division TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions HORizontal MAIn SECdiv Sets the time per division for the oscilloscope main time base This command is identical to the HORizontal MAIn SCAle command It is provided to maintain program compatibility with some older models of Tektronix oscilloscopes HORizontal POSition Sets or queries the main time base horizontal position This command is identical to the HORizontal MAIn POSition command This command is included for compatibility Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt HORizontal POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is the position in seconds This value is the difference between the trigger point and the center graticule Positive values place the trigger before the center graticule Examples HORizontal POSition 2 0E 6 Sets the main trigger position to 2 us before the center graticule HORizontal POSition Might return 1 0E 3 indicating that the main trigger position is 1 ms after the center graticule TD
127. d to its bit in the Status Register the corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero the event is not recorded The bits in the Enable Registers are set using various commands The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are described below The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The DESER shown in Figure 3 3 controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR as described earlier TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER Use the DESE query to read the DESER Figure 3 3 shows the DESER bit functions PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 3 The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER controls which type of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit ESB in the SBR Use the ESE command to set the bits in the ESER and use the ESE query to read it Figure 3 4 shows the ESER bit functions 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 4 The Event Status Enable Register ESER The Service Request Enable Register SRER The SRER controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request GPIB an
128. ds DATa WIDth WFMPre BN_Fmt Sets or queries the format of binary data for the waveform to be transferred Changing the value of WFMPre BN_Fmt also changes the value of DATa ENCdg Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre BN Fmt RI RP WFMPre BN_Fmt Arguments RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation Examples WFMPre BN Fmt RP Specifies that the binary waveform data are positive integer data points TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 245 Command Descriptions WFMPre BN Fmt Returns either RI or RP as the current waveform data format Related Commands DATa ENCdg WFMPre BYT_Nr Sets or queries the data width for the waveform to be transferred This command is equivalent to DATa WIDth Changing WFMPre BYT_Nr also changes WFMPre BIT_Nr and DATa WIDth Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre BYT Nr lt NR1 gt WFMPre BYT Nr Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer in the range of 1 to 2 that sets the number of bytes per point Examples WFMPre BYT Nr 2 Specifies that there are 2 bytes per waveform data point Related Commands DATa WIDth 2 246 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions WFMPre BYT_Or Sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a waveform data transfer when DATa WIDth or WFMPre BYT_Nr is set to 2 or WFMPre BIT_Nr is set to
129. e Service Request Enable sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable Register SRER Refer to the Status and Events chapter on page 3 1 for more information Group Status and Error Syntax SRE lt NR1 gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SRE Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer value in the range from 0 to 255 The binary bits of the SRER are set according to this value Using an out of range value causes an execution error The power on default for SRER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the SRER maintains its value through a power cycle Examples SRE 48 Sets the bits in the SRER to 00110000 binary SRE Might return a value of 32 showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value 00100000 Related Commands CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMSg FACtory PSC STB STB Query Only Read Status Byte query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register SBR using the Master Summary Status MSS bit Refer to the Status and Events chapter on page 3 1 for more information Group Status and Error Syntax STB Returns lt NR1 gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 199 Command Descriptions Examples STB Might return the value 96 showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000 Related Commands CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMSg FACtory SRE SWLoss Query only TPS2000 S
130. e Register SBR 3 3 Figure 3 3 The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER cerir i E E ieee epee E 3 5 Figure 3 4 The Event Status Enable Register ESER 3 5 Figure 3 5 The Service Request Enable Register SRER 3 5 Figure 3 6 Status and event handling process 3 9 Figure 3 7 Command processing without using synchronization sssssesssessssssssssssesses 3 11 Figure 3 8 Processing sequence with synchronization 3 11 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer iii Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Communications ports and functions Table 1 2 Oscilloscope extension module and adapter compatibility 08 Table 2 1 Oscilloscope communication protocol Table 2 2 BNF notation 000 Table 2 3 Command message elements Table 2 4 Comparison of Header Off and Header Om responses cece cece e cree eee eee Table 2 5 Types of numeric arguments Table 2 6 Oscilloscope handling of incorrect numeric arguments e cee econ Table 2 7 Parts of a block argument Table 2 8 Acquisition commands Table 2 9 Calibration and Diagnostic commands Table 2 10 Cursor commands Table 2 11 Display commands Table 2 12 File System commands Table 2 13 Hard Copy commands Table 2 14 Horizontal commands
131. e Susie E E E A 3 4 The Enable Registers and the PSC Command 3 6 QUEUES oraren a eE a PE EA AE P EEEE ata oa anata 3 6 The Output Queue yeeie ea e eee eee ee eee 3 6 The Event Queue oyee i eas te a oe ae eee 3 7 Event Handling Sequence 0 0 00 00 0 00a 3 8 Synchronization Methods 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3 10 Using the WAI Command 00008 3 11 Using the BUSY Query 0 0 0 0 000 008 3 13 Using the OPC Set Command 04 3 14 Using the OPC Query poraka ipede nak eee eee 3 16 MESSAGES oeri enpa pea oE diane Segre eave sede ote a anced gnatar ele 3 17 Programming Examples Programming Examples ccc cece eeeccees 4 1 Appendices Appendix A ASCII Code Chart 006 A 1 Appendix B Factory Setup essssssesossessssseseo B 1 TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Oscilloscopes B 1 TPS2000 Series Oscilloscopes 0 000 c eee eee B 3 TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Oscilloscopes B 5 TDS210 and TDS220 Oscilloscopes 00000 B 6 TDS224 Oscilloscopes 0 eee eee eee B 8 Glossary and Index ii TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 2 1 Command message elements 2 4 Figure 2 2 Block Argument example 2 14 Figure 3 1 The Standard Event Status Register SESR 3 2 Figure 3 2 The Status Byt
132. e channel to 10X attenuation 50 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 50X attenuation 100 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 100X attenuation 1000 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1000X attenuation Returns lt NR1 gt Examples CH2 CURRENTPRObe 1000 This sets channel 2 to 1000X attenuation CH1 CURRENTPRObe Might return 10 CH lt x gt INVert NOTE You can NOT use this command with a TDS210 or TDS220 oscilloscope with firmware below V 2 00 and a TDS2CMA or TDS2CM communications module Sets or queries the inversion state of the specified oscilloscope channel The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments This command is equivalent to setting the Invert option in the Vertical channel menus Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt INVert ON OFF CH lt x gt INVert 2 66 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments ON inverts the specified oscilloscope channel OFF sets the specified oscilloscope channel to non inverted Examples CH1 INVert ON Inverts the signal on channel 1 CH2 INVert Might return OFF indicating that channel 2 is not inverted CH lt x gt POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified oscilloscope channel The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instrum
133. e error 221 Settings conflict Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTOSet VIEW MULTICYcle SINGLECYcle FFT RISINGedge FALLINGedge FIELD ODD EVEN LINE LINENum DCLIne DEFault NONE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments MULTICYcle displays a sine or square wave of several cycles Default for sine like and square like signals SINGLECYcle displays a sine or square wave of approximately one cycle FFT displays the FFT of a sine wave RISING displays the rising edge of a square wave FALLING displays the falling edge of a square wave FIELD displays a video signal synchronized on all fields This is the default for video signals ODD displays a video signal synchronized on odd fields EVEN displays a video signal synchronized on even fields LINE displays a video signal synchronized on all lines LINENum displays a video signal synchronized on the specified line number DCLIne returns a query response when the oscilloscope finds a DC level DEFault returns a query response when the oscilloscope cannot determine the signal type NONE returns a query response when the AUTOSET menu is not displayed Set is ignored Examples AUTOSet VIEW EVEN The oscilloscope will display video signals synchronized on even fields when operated in autoset mode BUSY Query Only Returns the status of the oscilloscope This command allows you to synchronize the
134. e through a power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the DESE command to set the DESER Refer to Event Handling Sequence on page 3 8 for more information Examples ESE 209 Sets the ESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 103 Command Descriptions ESE Might return the string ESE 186 showing that the ESER contains the binary value 10111010 Related Commands CLS DESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB ESR Query Only Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register SESR ESR also clears the SESR since reading the SESR clears it Refer to the Status and Events chapter on page 3 1 for more information Group Status and Error Syntax ESR Returns Contents of the Standard Event Status Register Examples ESR Might return the value 213 showing that the SESR contains binary 11010101 Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE EVENT EVMsg OPC SRE STB 2 104 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions EVENT Query Only Returns from the Event Queue an event code that provides information about the results of the last ESR read EVENT also removes the returned value from the Event
135. ed to maintain program compatibility with some older models of Tektronix oscilloscopes HORizontal MAIn Query Only Returns all settings for the oscilloscope main time base The HORizontal MAIn SECdiv and HORizontal MAIn SCAle com mands are identical so only HORizontal MAIn SCAle is returned Group Horizontal Syntax HORi zontal MAIn Returns All settings for the main time base Examples HORi zontal MAIn Might return HORIZONTAL MAIN POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 5 0E 4 HORizontal MAIn POSition Sets or queries the main time base horizontal position This command is equivalent to adjusting the Horizontal Position when Main is selected from the Horizontal menu Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MAIn POSition lt NR3 gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 137 Command Descriptions HORi zontal MAIn POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is the position in seconds This value is the difference between the trigger point and the center graticule Positive values place the trigger before the center graticule Examples HORizontal MAIn POSition 2 0E 6 Sets the main trigger position to 2 us before the center graticule HORizontal MAIn POSition Might return 1 0E 3 indicating that the main trigger position is 1 ms after the center graticule HORizontal MAIn SCAle 2 138 Sets the time per division for the main time base This command is equivalent to setting SEC DIV when Main is selecte
136. een taken to generate a log report TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss LOG CONDUCTION Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss LOG CONDUCTION Might return 6 0524113476E 2 Related Commands SWLoss LOG INDEX SWLoss LOG TOTAL SWLoss LOG TURNON SWLoss LOG TUNROFF SWLoss LOG INDEX TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries which measurement to return for the following commands SWLoss LOG CONDUCTION SWLoss LOG TO TAL SWLoss LOG TURNON and SWLoss LOG TURNOFF NOTE The SWLoss AVErage N command returns the number of measurements currently accumulated in the log Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss LOG INDEX lt NR1 gt SWLoss LOG INDEX TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 207 Command Descriptions Arguments lt NR1 gt The default value is 1 Examples SWLoss LOG INDEX Might return 5 SWLoss LOG TOTAL Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 208 Returns the Total Loss for a switching loss measurement specified by the SWLoss LOG INDEX command NOTE The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss LOG IN DEX command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss AVErage N This indicates that insufficient measurements have been taken to generate a log report Group Power Measu
137. efinition for the math waveform Group Math 2 146 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax MATH Returns Definition for the math waveform Examples MATH Might return the following for an FFT waveform gt MATH DEFINE FFT CH1 HANNING VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 1 0E0 MATH FFT HORIZONTAL POSITION 5 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 MATH FFT VERTICAL POSITION 0 0EO SCALE 1 0E0 MATH DEFINE Performs the specified mathematical operation on the input signal or signals To activate or deactivate the math waveform use the SELect lt wfm gt command refer to page 2 197 Group Math Syntax MATH DEFINE lt QString gt MATH DEF INE NOTE Remember that lt QString gt must be enclosed in quotes You can use white space characters between words TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 147 Command Descriptions 2 148 Arguments lt QString gt specifies a math waveform and can be one of the following TDS1001 TDS1002 TDS1012 TDS2002 TDS2012 and TDS2022 models TDS210 and TDS220 models firmware V2 00 and above with a TDS2MM measurement module CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH1 FFT CH lt x gt lt window gt TDS2004 TDS2014 and TDS2024 models TDS224 model with a TDS2MM measurement module CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH1 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH3 FFT CH lt x gt lt window gt TDS210 and TDS220 models firmware below
138. ements have been taken to generate a log report Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss LOG TURNON Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss LOG TURNON Might return 1 7111644149E 2 Related Commands SWLoss LOG INDEX SWLoss LOGCONDUCTION SWLoss LOG TURNOFF SWLoss LOG TOTAL 2 210 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SWLoss SAVE TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Saves the Switching Loss measurements to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card Uses CSV format NOTE You can view the contents of the saved file on your personal computer You cannot recall saved Switching Loss files to the oscilloscope Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss SAVE lt filename gt SWLoss SAVE Arguments lt filename gt specifies the file name and full path to save switching loss measurement data Examples SWLoss SAVE A Data2 CSV Specifies the file name and path to save switching loss measurement data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card SWLoss SOURCES TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries the input sources for Switching Loss measurements Before taking measurements you must use the CH lt x gt YUNit command to set the units of the voltage and current sources TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 211 Command Descriptions Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss SOURCES
139. ency Might return TRIGGER MAIN FREQUENCY 1 0E3 Related Commands MEASUrement IMMed VALue TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions TRIGger MAIn HOLDOff Query Only Returns the trigger holdoff value Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn HOLDOf f Returns Main trigger holdoff value Examples TRIGger MAIn HOLDOF f Might return TRIGGER MAIN HOLDOFF VALUE 5 0E 7 TRIGger MAIn HOLDOff VALue Sets or queries the oscilloscope trigger holdoff value Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn HOLDOff VALue lt NR3 gt TRIGger MAIn HOLDOff VALue Arguments lt NR3 gt is the main trigger holdoff value The range is 500 ns to 10 s Examples TRIGger MAIn HOLDOff VALue 10 Sets the holdoff value to 10s TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 227 Command Descriptions TRIGger MAIn LEVel Sets the oscilloscope edge all models and pulse width TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only trigger level This command is equivalent to adjusting the front panel TRIGGER LEVEL knob NOTE When the edge trigger source is set to AC LINE the oscilloscope ignores the set form of the command and generates event 221 Settings conflict When the edge trigger source is set to AC LINE the query form of the command returns zero Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn LEVel lt NR3 gt TRIGger MAIn LEVel Arguments lt NR3 gt
140. entical to the HEADer query and is included for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions HEADer Sets and queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the oscilloscope to either include or omit headers on query responses This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk they never return headers Group Miscellaneous Syntax HEADer lt NR1 gt OFF ON HEADer Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to true This causes the oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses You can then use the query response as a command OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false This causes the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned Examples HEADer OFF Causes the oscilloscope to omit headers from query responses HEADer Might return 1 showing that the Response Header Enable State is true Related Commands VERBose TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 133 Command Descriptions HORizontal Query Only Returns all settings for the horizontal commands The commands HORizontal MAIn SCAle HORizontal MAIn SECdiv HORizon tal SCAle and HORizontal SECdiv are equivalent so HORizon tal MAIn SCAle is the value that is returned The
141. ents The position voltage value is applied to the signal before digitiza tion This command is equivalent to adjusting the front panel VERTICAL POSITION knob Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is the position in divisions from the center graticule Table 2 28 lists the vertical position ranges using a 1X probe TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 67 Command Descriptions Table 2 28 Vertical position ranges using a 1X probe CH lt x gt SCAle Position range 2 mV div 1000 divs 5 mV div 400 divs 10 mV div 200 divs 20 mV div 100 divs 50 mV div 40 divs 100 mV div 20 divs 200 mV div 10 divs 500 mV div 100 divs 1 Vidiv 50 divs 2 Vidiv 25 divs 5 Vidiv 10 divs Examples CH2 POSition 1 32E0 Positions the channel 2 input signal 1 32 divisions above the center of the display CH1 POSition Might return 1 32E0 indicating that the current position of channel 1 is at 1 32 divisions CH lt x gt PRObe Sets or queries the attenuation factor of the specified channel or voltage probes The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments Group Vertical 2 68 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe 1 10 20 50 100 500 1000 CH lt x gt PRObe Argume
142. eo fields and lines Table 2 24 lists and describes Trigger commands TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 24 Trigger commands Header Description TRIGger Force trigger event TRIGger MAIn Set main trigger level to 50 Query returns main trigger settings TRIGger MAIn EDGE Return edge trigger settings TRIGger MAIn EDGE COUPling Set or query the edge trigger cou pling TRIGger MAIn EDGE SLOpe Set or query the edge trigger slope TRIGger MAIn EDGE SOUrce Set or query the edge trigger source TRIGger MAIn FREQuency Return trigger frequency value TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only TRIGger MAIn HOLDOff TRIGger MAIn HOLDOff VALue TRIGger MAIn LEVel TRIGger MAIn MODe TRIGger MAIn PULse TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only TRIGger MAIn PULse SOUrce TDS 1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth POLarity TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WHEN TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WIDth Return trigger holdoff value Set or query the trigger holdoff value Set or query the trigger level Set or query the trigger mode Return pulse trigger settings Set or query the pulse trigger source Return pulse trigger width parame ters Set or query the pulse trig
143. eries with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the current Switching Loss measurement settings Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss Examples SWLoss Might return the following SWLOSS ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS ENABLE ON SOURCES CH1CH2 STOPAFTER 10 TONSTART 90 TONEND 10 TOFFSTART 10 TOFFEND 10 VSAT 4 300000190735E0 UNITS WATTS SWLoss ACQuire TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 200 Sets or queries the type of acquisition used for Switching Loss measurements Group Power Measurement TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax SWLoss ACQuire STOPAfter CONTINUOUS SWLoss ACQuire Arguments STOPAfter instructs the oscilloscope to perform measurements on N acquisitions and then stop CONTINUOUS instructs the oscilloscope to continuously acquire waveforms and display measurements Examples SWLoss ACQuire Might return SWLOSS ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS indicating that the oscilloscope is continuously taking switching loss measurements Related Commands SWLoss STOPAfter SWLoss AVErage CONDUCTION Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is conducting in its on state The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg column of the Switching Loss display You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the SWLoss
144. ers as part of the query and formats the query response as a valid set command When header is off the oscilloscope sends back only the values in the response This format can make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response Table 2 4 shows the difference in responses Table 2 4 Comparison of Header Off and Header On responses Query Header Off response Header On response ACQuire NUMAVg ACQUIRE NUMAVG 64 CHx1 COUPling CH1 COUPLING DC Clearing the Output Queue To clear the output queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new command or query send a Device Clear DCL from a GPIB host From an RS 232 host send a break signal The RS 232 interface responds by returning the ASCII string DCL From a USB host send an INITIATE_CLEAR followed by a CHECK_CLEAR_STATUS The USB interface responds to CHECK_CLEAR_STATUS with STATUS_SUCCESS when it is finished clearing the output queue TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 5 Command Syntax Command Entry Follow these general rules when entering commands m Enter commands in upper or lower case m You can precede any command with white space characters White space characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and OB through 20 hexadecimal 0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal m The oscilloscope ignores commands that consists of just a combination of white space characters and line feeds
145. es soft flagging TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Examples RS232 SOFTFlagging ON Activates soft flagging and deactivates hard flagging RS232 TRANsmit TERMinator TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the end of line EOL terminator When transmitting the oscilloscope appends the terminator to the end of each message When receiving the oscilloscope accepts all four terminators regardless of the currently selected terminator When a combination of multiple characters is selected CRLF or LFCR the oscilloscope interprets the first character as the terminator it treats the second character as a null command CR represents an ASCII carriage return character OxOD and LF represents an ASCII linefeed character 0x0A Group RS 232 Syntax RS232 TRANsmit TERMinator CR LF CRLf LFCr RS232 TRANsmit TERMinator Arguments CR selects the carriage return character as the EOL terminator LF selects the line feed character as the EOL terminator CRLf selects the carriage return and line feed characters as the EOL terminator LFCr selects the line feed and carriage return characters as the EOL terminator Examples RS232 TRANsmit TERMinator CR Sets the carriage return as the EOL terminator TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 189 Command Descriptions RST Set Only 2 190 Reset Returns the osci
146. es that are in the Event Queue This is useful when using ALLEv since it lets you know exactly how many events will be returned Group Status and Error Syntax EVQty Returns lt NR1 gt Examples EVQty Might return 3 as the number of event codes in the Event Queue TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Related Commands ALLEv EVENT EVMsg FACtory Set Only Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings Refer to Appendix B Factory Setup for a list of the factory default settings Group Miscellaneous Syntax FACtory Setting the oscilloscope to factory default has the following impact on the programming interface Clears the Event Status Enable Register Clears the Service Request Enable Register Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255 Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE Enables all Command Headers HEADer ON Sets the macro defined by DDT to a zero length field Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations Performs the equivalent of DATA INIT The FACtory command does not alter the following items State of the RS 232 GPIB or USB interface Selected GPIB address Front panel LOCK state Verbose state Display Brightness TPS2000 series only Display Contrast TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 107 Command Descriptions
147. esent only when the TDS2MM module is installed HEADER 1 VERBOSE 13 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DESTINATION REFA SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 2500 WIDTH 1 LOCK NONE DISPLAY FORMAT YT STYLE VECTORS PERSISTENCE 0 CONTRAST 50 B 6 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Appendix B Factory Setup s ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE NUMAVG 16 STATE 1 STOPAFTER RUNSTOP CH1 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF lt INVERT OFF gt CH2 PROBE 10 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF lt INVERT OFF gt sHORIZONTAL VIEW MAIN MAIN SCALE 5 0E 4 POSITION 0 0E0 HORIZONTAL DELAY SCALE 5 0E 5 POSITION 0 0E0 TRIGGER MAIN MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE HOLDOFF VALUE 5 0E 7 TRIGGER MAIN EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER MAIN VIDEO SOURCE CH1 SYNC LINE POLARITY NORMAL TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL 0 0E0 SELECT CH1 1 CH2 0 MATH O REFA 0 REFB 0 CURSOR FUNCTION OFF SELECT SOURCE CH1 CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 2 0E 3 POSITION2 2 0E 3 CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 3 2E0 POSITION2 3 2E0 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 s MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE NONE SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD SOURCE CH1 MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 lt FFT HORIZONTAL POSITION 5 0E1 SCALE 1 0E0 gt lt MATH FFT VERTICAL POSITION 0 0E0 SCALE 1 0E0 gt HARDCOPY FORMAT EPSON PORT
148. espond ing DATa ENCdg values to update Group Waveform Syntax DATa ENCdg ASCIi RIBinary RPBinary SRIbinary SRPbinary DATa ENCdg TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 87 Command Descriptions 2 88 Arguments ASCTi specifies the ASCII representation of signed integer RIBinary data If this is the value at power on the WFMPre values for BN_Fmt BYT_Or and ENCdg are set as RP MSB and ASC respectively RIBinary specifies signed integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first This format results in the fastest data transfer rate when DATa WIDth is set to 2 The range is 128 to 127 when DATa WIDth is 1 Zero is center screen The range is 32768 to 32767 when DATa WIDth is 2 The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen RPBinary specifies positive integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first The range is 0 to 255 when DATa WIDth is 1 Center screen is 127 The range is 0 to 65 535 when DATa WIDth is 2 The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible
149. ete cycle in the waveform PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage of the first complete cycle in the waveform MINImum TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the value of the smallest point in the waveform MAXImum TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TDS2000 series only is the value of the largest point in the waveform TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 165 Command Descriptions RISe TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the rise time between 10 and 90 of the first rising edge of the waveform Rising edge must be displayed to measure The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10 and 90 measure ment points FALL TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the fall time between 90 and 10 of the first falling edge of the waveform Falling edge must be displayed to measure The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10 and 90 measure ment points PWIdth TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the positive pulse width between the first rising edge and the next falling edge at the waveform 50 level Rising and falling edges must be displayed to measure The o
150. ettings 2 107 RS 232 command group 2 32 RS232 commands RS232 2 185 RS232 BAUD 2 185 RS232 HARDFLAGGING 2 186 RS232 PARITY 2 187 RS232 SOFTFLAGGING 2 188 RS232 TRANSMIT TERMINA TOR 2 189 RS232 2 185 RS232 TRANSMIT TERMINA TOR 2 189 RS232 BAUD 2 185 RS232 HARDFLAGGING 2 186 RS232 PARITY 2 187 RS232 SOFTFLAGGING 2 188 RST 2 190 Rules command entry 2 6 Rules quoted strings 2 12 S SAV 2 191 Save and recall command group 2 32 Save and recall commands RCL 2 182 RECALL SETUP 2 182 SAV 2 191 SAVE IMAGE 2 192 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT 2 193 SAVE SETUP 2 194 SAVE WAVEFORM 2 195 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer __ Index 9 Index Save setting command 2 191 SAVE IMAGE 2 192 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT 2 193 SAVE SETUP 2 194 SAVE WAVEFORM 2 195 SBR register 2 199 3 3 SELECT 2 196 SELECT lt wfm gt 2 197 Self test 2 240 Separator command 2 3 Serial poll 3 3 Service request enable command 2 198 Service request enable register 2 198 SESR register 2 71 2 104 2 169 3 2 Set command 2 2 SET 2 197 Setting command query 2 146 query 2 146 recall command 2 182 save command 2 191 Setups factory TDS1000 B 5 TDS1000B B 1 TDS2000 B 5 TDS2000B B 1 TDS210 B 6 TDS220 B 6 TDS224 B 8 TPS2000 B 3 SRE command 2 198 3 5 SRER register 2 181 2 198 3 5 Status 3 1 Status and error command group 2 33 Status and error commands R
151. firmware version number gt TPS2XXXV v lt module firmware version number gt Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes ID TEK lt model number gt CF 91 1CT FV v lt oscilloscope firmware version number gt Examples ID Might return the following response with a TDS2CMA installed ID TEK TDS 220 CF 91 1CT FV v1 00 TDS2CM CMV v1 00 Might return the following response with a TDS2MEM installed ID TEK TDS 2022 CF 91 1CT TDS2MEM FV v6 00 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Might return the following response with a TPS2PWR installed ID TEK TPS 2012 CF 91 1CT FV v9 48 TPS2PWR1 v1 00 Might return the following response for a TDS1012B oscilloscope ID TEK TDS 1012B CF 91 1CT FV v21 21 Related Commands IDN IDN Query Only Returns the oscilloscope identification code in IEEE 488 2 notation NOTE IDN must be the last command when part of a concatenated statement Otherwise the oscilloscope generates event message 440 The IDN and ID responses are slightly different Group Status and Events Syntax IDN Returns Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2CM TDS2CMA and TDS2MM modules TEKTRONIX lt model number gt CF 91 1CT FV v lt oscilloscope firmware version number gt TDS2XX XXV v lt module firmware version number gt Where XX is the module type CM TDS2CM
152. for Universal Serial Bus USBTMC An acronym for USB Test and Measurement Class USB488 The USBTMC subclass specification that implements an IEEF488 like interface over USB Glossary 2TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Index A Abbreviating commands 2 6 ACQUIRE 2 45 ACQUIRE MODE 2 46 ACQUIRE NUMACQ 2 47 ACQUIRE NUMAVG 2 48 ACQUIRE STATE 2 49 ACQUIRE STOPAFTER 2 50 Acquisition command group 2 15 Acquisition commands ACQUIRE 2 45 ACQUIRE MODE 2 46 ACQUIRE NUMACQ 2 47 ACQUIRE NUMAVG 2 48 ACQUIRE STATE 2 49 ACQUIRE STOPAFTER 2 50 ALLEV 2 51 Argument command 2 3 ASCII 2 1 code chart A 1 AUTORANGE 2 52 AUTORANGE SETTINGS 2 54 AUTORANGE STATE 2 53 AUTOSET 2 55 AUTOSET ENABLE 2 55 AUTOSET SIGNAL 2 55 AUTOSET VIEW 2 56 Block command argument 2 13 BNF Backus Naur form 2 2 Break signal 2 5 BUSY 2 57 3 13 c CAL 2 58 CALIBRATE ABORT 2 59 CALIBRATE CONTINUE 2 60 CALIBRATE FACTory 2 60 CALIBRATE INTERNAL 2 61 CALIBRATE STATUS 2 62 Calibration and diagnostic com mand group 2 16 Calibration and diagnostic com mands CAL 2 58 CALIBRATE ABORT 2 59 CALIBRATE CONTINUE 2 60 CALIBRATE FACTory 2 60 CALIBRATE INTERNAL 2 61 CALIBRATE STATUS 2 62 DIAG RESULT FLAG 2 96 DIAG RESULT LOG 2 96 ERRORLOG FIRST 2 102 ERRORLOG NEXT 2 102 CH lt x gt command mnemonic 2 9 CH lt x gt 2 62 CH lt x gt BANDWIDTH 2 63 CH lt x gt COUPLING
153. ger polarity Set or query the pulse trigger when Set or query the pulse trigger width TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 35 Command Groups Table 2 24 Trigger commands Cont Header Description TRIGger MAIn TYPe Set or query the main trigger type TRIGger MAIn VIDeo Query video trigger parameters TRIGger MAIn VIDeo LINE Set or query the video trigger line TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only TRIGger MAIn VIDeo POLarity TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SOUrce TRIGger MAIn VIDeo STANdard TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only Set or query the video trigger polarity Set or query the video trigger source Set or query the video trigger standard TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SYNC TRIGger STATE Return trigger system status Set or query the video trigger sync Vertical Commands 2 36 Vertical commands control the attributes of the channels The SELect lt wfm gt command also displays a specified waveform or removes it from the display Table 2 25 lists and describes Vertical commands Table 2 25 Vertical commands Header Description CH lt x gt Return vertical parameters CH lt x gt BANdwidth Set or query the channel bandwidth CH lt x gt COUPling Set or query the channel coupling CH lt x gt CURRENTPRObe Set or query the scale settings for current TDS1000B TDS2000B and probes TPS2000 only TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programme
154. ght return V indicating the units for measurement 3 are volts TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 167 Command Descriptions MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Query Only 2 168 Returns the value that has been calculated for the oscilloscope on screen periodic measurement specified by lt x gt Where lt x gt identifies the measurement 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series and 1 through 5 for the TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series This value is a display value and will be updated about every 1 2 second if both the MEASURE menu and the MEAS lt x gt source channel are displayed If you are acquiring at a slow sweep rate the oscilloscope may take longer than 1 2 second to update NOTE MEASurement IMMed is usually more useful than MEASUre ment MEAS lt x gt when using the oscilloscope with external devices If MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe is set to NONE MEASUre ment MEAS lt x gt VALue generates event message 2231 Measure ment error measurement is not activated and returns 9 9E37 If the channel specified by MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce is not displayed on the oscilloscope the oscilloscope generates event message 2225 Measurement error no waveform to measure and returns 9 9E37 Use the ESR and ALLEv queries to check for measurement errors An example error is 2204 Low signal amplitude NOTE If Trigger View is active scan mode is in effect or
155. ght return 0 to indicate that it completed successfully Related Commands CALibrate INTERNAL CALibrate ABOrt Set Only NOTE You should only use this command in a qualified service environment For more information about the factory calibration sequence refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope Aborts the factory calibration process When you abort the factory calibration the oscilloscope restores the calibration settings to the previous factory calibration constants stored in non volatile memory Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate ABOrt Examples CALibrate ABOrt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 59 Command Descriptions Stops the in process factory calibration procedure CALibrate CONTINUE Set Only NOTE You should only use this command in a qualified service environment For more information about the factory calibration sequence refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope Performs the next step in the factory calibration operation Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate CONTINUE Examples CALibrate CONTINUE Performs the next step in the factory calibration operation CALibrate FACtory Set Only 2 60 NOTE You should only use this command in a qualified service environment For more information about the factory calibration sequence refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope Starts the oscillosco
156. gnored by the oscilloscope RS232 Query Only TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 Series Only Returns the RS232 settings Group RS 232 Syntax RS232 Returns The current RS 232 settings Examples RS232 Might return the following string RS232 BAUD 9600 SOFTFLAGGING 0 HARDFLAGGING 1 PARITY NONE TRANSMIT TERMINATOR LF RS232 BAUd TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the RS 232C interface transmission speed If no flow control flagging is used commands may be received faster than the oscilloscope can process them Also if another command is sent immediately after this command without waiting for the baud rate to be programmed the first couple of characters may be lost Group RS 232 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 185 Command Descriptions Syntax RS232 BAUd lt NR1 gt RS232 BAUd Arguments lt NR1 gt which can be 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 Examples RS232 BAUd 9600 Sets the transmission rate to 9600 baud RS232 HARDFlagging TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 Series Only 2 186 Sets or queries the state of RS232 hard flagging When hard flagging is enabled the oscilloscope sends data as long as CTS Clear To Send is asserted When receiving data the oscilloscope asserts RTS Request To Send until the input buffer is almost full When the oscilloscope no longer asserts RTS it continues to read incom
157. he HARDCopy FORMat and HARDCopy LAYout commands This command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT button on the front panel of the TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series or the HARDCOPY button on the front panel of the TDS200 series NOTE The TDS1000B and TDS2000B series support the HARDCo py PORT commands and queries for compatibility with programs designed for earlier oscilloscopes For TDS1000B and TDS2000B series you can only set the port to USB and the query will always return USB The TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes provide PictBridge printer support through a USB Device port on the rear of the oscilloscope See the PictBridge commands on page 2 27 HARDCopy returns format layout and port information NOTE This command is not IEEE Std 488 2 1987 compatible Group Hard copy Syntax HARDCopy ABOrt STARt HARDCopy Arguments ABOrt terminates the hard copy output in process TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions NOTE DCL does not clear the output queue once a hard copy is in process The only way to abort the hard copy process is to send the HARDCopy ABOrt command The output queue can then be cleared by sending a DCL message STARt initiates a screen copy that is sent to the port specified by the HARDCOPY PORT command NOTE Use the WAI command between HARDCopy STARt commands to ensure that the first hard copy is co
158. he hard copy output to Epson C80 model printer format Available on TDS1000 and TDS2000 series models with firmware versions 2 12 or greater two channel models or 4 12 or greater four channel models any firmware version with a TDS2CMA TDS2CMAX or TDS2MEM module installed or the TPS2000 series EPSIMAGE sets the hard copy format data to Postscript format EPSOn TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 series only sets the hard copy output format to 9 pin or 24 pin dot matrix printer format TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 119 Command Descriptions INTERLEAF TDS200 series only sets the hard copy format data to Interleaf file format JPEG TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only sets the hard copy format to JPEG format LASERJet TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 series only sets the hard copy output format to HP LaserJet II printer format PCX sets the hard copy output format to DOS Paintbrush format RLE TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only sets the hard copy output format to Windows color image file format RLE Use RLE for faster transfer rates and smaller resulting files Many programs that recognize BMP files also recognize RLE files THINK jet TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 series only sets the hard copy output format to HP Thinkjet printer format TIFF TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 series only sets the hard copy output format to Tagged Image F
159. he specified waveform ON or lt NR1 gt 0 activates the display of the specified waveform lt wfm gt can be CH lt x gt MATH or REF lt y gt Refer to Constructed Mnemonics on page 2 9 for more information Examples SELect CH2 ON Displays channel 2 SELect REFA Returns either 0 or 1 indicating whether the REFA waveform is displayed SET Query Only Returns most oscilloscope settings You can send these responses back to the oscilloscope to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you sent SET This query is identical to the LRN query Group Miscellaneous TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 197 Command Descriptions SRE 2 198 Syntax SET NOTE The SET query always returns command headers regardless of the setting of the HEADer command This is because the returned data is intended to be able to be sent back to the oscilloscope as concatenated commands The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length Returns Most oscilloscope settings See Appendix B Factory Setup Examples SET A partial return string may look like the following sACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMAVG 16 HEADER 1 VERBOSE 1 DISPLAY FORMAT YT STYLE VECTORS PERSISTENCE 500 0E 3 CONTRAST 50 LOCK NONE HARDCOPY FORMAT EPSON PORT RS232 LAYOUT PORTRAIT Related Commands HEADer LRN VERBos
160. hrough 255 decimal lt Block gt A block of data bytes defined as lt Block gt lt NZDig gt lt Dig gt lt Dig gt lt DChar gt 0 lt DChar gt lt terminator gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 13 Command Syntax Figure 2 2 shows an example of a block argument Block argument nN DDT 21 7ACQuire STATE RUN X Block header Specifies data length Specifies number of length digits that follow Figure 2 2 Block Argument example lt NZDig gt specifies the number of lt Dig gt elements that follow Taken together the lt Dig gt elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many lt DChar gt elements follow 0 means that the lt Block gt is an indefinite length block The lt terminator gt ends the block You should not use indefinite length blocks with RS 232 because there is no way to include a lt termina tor gt character as a lt DChar gt character The first occurrence of a lt terminator gt character signals the end of the block and any subsequent lt DChar gt characters will be interpreted as a syntax error With the GPIB the EOI line signals the last byte With the USB the EOM bit signals the last byte 2 14 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer ES SSS Command Groups This section lists the commands organized by functional group The Command Descriptions section starting on page 2 45 lists all commands
161. ht return 5 0E1 indicating that the 50 point in the data record is horizontally centered on the display MATH FFT HORizontal SCAle NOTE You can use this command with a TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscope as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module Sets or queries the FFT math waveform horizontal zoom factor Group Math TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 151 Command Descriptions Syntax MATH FFT HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH FFT HORizontal SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the horizontal magnification factor where the axis of magnification is the center vertical graticule line Valid zoom factors are 1 2 5 and 10 If other values are entered the oscilloscope rounds the value of lt NR3 gt to the nearest valid zoom factor Examples MATH FFT HORizontal SCAle 5 Sets the FFT waveform horizontal zoom factor to X5 MATH FFT HORizontal SCAle Might return 2 0E0 indicating that the zoom factor setting is X2 MATH FFT VERtical POSition 2 152 NOTE You can use this command with a TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscope as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module Sets or queries the FFT math waveform vertical position Group Math Syntax MATH FFT VERtical POSition lt NR3 gt MATH FFT VERtical POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the FFT waveform vert
162. ical position in divisions TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Examples MATH FFT VERtical POSition 2 Sets the FFT waveform vertical position to 2 major divisions above the center horizontal graticule line MATH FFT VERtical POSition Might return 5 indicating that the FFT waveform 0 reference point is 5 major divisions from the center horizontal graticule line MATH FFT VERtical SCAle NOTE You can use this command with a TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscope as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module Sets or queries the FFT math waveform vertical zoom factor Group Math Syntax MATH FFT VERtical SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH FFT VERtical SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the vertical zoom factor where the axis of magnification is the center horizontal graticule line Valid zoom factors are 0 5 1 2 5 and 10 If other values are entered the oscilloscope rounds the value of lt NR3 gt to the nearest valid zoom factor Examples MATH FFT VERtical SCAle 5 Sets the FFT waveform vertical zoom factor to X5 MATH FFT VERtical SCAle TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 153 Command Descriptions Might return 2 0E0 indicating that the zoom factor setting is X2 MATH VERtical Query Only TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Returns the MATH VERtical display settings
163. ices The SRQ when it comes interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task Take peak to peak measurement on acquired data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated programming Using the OPC Query the Most Simple Approach OPC places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation is complete A timeout could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data in it The same command sequence using OPC for synchronization follows Set up single sequence acquisition SELECT CH1 ON ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PK2PK MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC 3 16 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events Wait for read from Output Queue Take peak to peak measurement on acquired data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Using OPC synchronization is the simplest approach It requires no status handling or loops However you must set the controller time out for longer than the acquisition operation Messages Tables 3 3 through 3 9 list all the programming interface messages the oscilloscope generates in response to commands and queries Each message is the result of an event Each type of even
164. ies Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual 071 1076 XX TDS200 Series Digital Real Time Oscilloscopes Service Manual 071 0492 XX Conventions Refer to the Command Syntax section of the Syntax and Commands chapter page 2 1 for information about command conventions This manual uses the following convention m References to the TDS2CMA Communications Extension Module include the TDS2CM and TDS2CMAX modules Command descriptions list specific oscilloscopes series and module when commands are valid for only those products TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer xi Preface xii TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Getting Started BSS Getting Started This manual contains information on how to remotely control and operate your oscilloscope through communications protocol and commands NOTE For TDS1000B and TDS2000B series you need to install the PC Communications software from the CD that came with the oscilloscope on a PC before you connect the oscilloscope USB Device port to the PC Refer to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B user manual for installation information For all products you need to connect an appropriate cable between the communications port on your oscilloscope and your PC The next table describes where the communications port is located on an extension module or oscilloscope and the function of the port Table 1 1 Communications ports and fu
165. ile Format Examples HARDCopy FORMat LASERJet Sets the hard copy output format to LaserJet II HARDCopy FORMat Might return EPSON as the hard copy output format HARDCopy INKSaver TDS 2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 120 Sets the TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Ink Saver feature to on or off This command is equivalent to setting the Ink Saver option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup menu of TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscopes This command has no effect in TDS1000 oscilloscope but is accepted for compatibility TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions NOTE This command also controls the format of saved images Group Hard copy Syntax HARDCopy INKSaver ON OFF HARDCopy INKSaver Arguments OFF prints WYSIWYG hard copies with color waveforms on a black background ON default prints color waveforms on a white background Examples HARDCopy INKSaver Might return ON HARDCopy LAYout Selects the printing orientation This command is equivalent to setting the Layout option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Hard Copy Setup menu NOTE This command also controls the format of saved images Only TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes are compatible with PictBridge printers When printing to a PictBridge printer the printer determines the orienatation and will override the argument G
166. illoscope You can set the position and time per division of both the main and window time bases You can substitute SECdiv for SCAle in all appropriate horizontal commands This provides program compati bility with previous Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes Table 2 14 lists and describes Horizontal commands Table 2 14 Horizontal commands Header HORizontal HORizontal DELay HORizontal DELay POSition HORizontal DELay SCAle HORizontal DELay SECdiv HORizontal MAIn HORizontal MAIn POSition TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Description Return horizontal settings Return all settings for the window time base Position window Set or query the window time base time division Same as HORizontal DELay SCAle Return the main time base time division Set or query the main time base trigger point 2 21 Command Groups Table 2 14 Horizontal commands Cont Header HORizontal MAIn SCAle Description Set or query the main time base time di vision HORizontal MAIn SECdiv Same as HORizontal MAIn SCAle HORizontal POSition HORizontal RECOrdlength HORizontal SCAle HORizontal SECdiv HORizontal VIEW Math Commands Math commands provide math function definition Table 2 15 lists 2 22 and describes Math commands Table 2 15 Math commands Header MATH MATH DEFINE MATH FFT MATH FFT HORizontal POSition TDS200 with a TDS2MM module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS
167. ing data until the input buffer is full and then reports an input overrun error The oscilloscope asserts DTR Data Terminal Ready at all times when the oscilloscope power is on Hard flagging and soft flagging cannot be on at the same time However hard and soft flagging can both be off at the same time Turning hard flagging on turns soft flagging off Turning soft flagging on turns hard flagging off Group RS 232 Syntax RS232 HARDFlagging ON OFF lt NR1 gt RS232 HARDF lagging Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt 0 activates hard flagging and turns off soft flagging TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 deactivates hard flagging RTS always asserted Examples RS232 HARDFlagging ON Activates hard flagging and deactivates soft flagging RS232 PARity TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the parity used for all RS 232C data transfers When parity is odd or even the oscilloscope generates the selected parity on output and checks all input against the selected parity When parity is none the oscilloscope performs no input parity error checks and generates no output parity When the parity ninth bit does not match the parity type the oscilloscope reports a parity error If another command is sent immediately after this command without waiting for the parity to be programmed the first few characters may be lost Gro
168. ing folder on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group File system Syntax FILESystem DIR Examples FILESystem DIR Might return FILESYSTEM DIR ALLOOO ALLOO1 Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem FORMat Set Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Formats the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Formatting a CompactFlash card or a USB flash drive deletes all files and folders on the memory device Group File system Syntax FILESystem FORMat lt drive gt Arguments lt drive gt is a quoted string that sets the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only to format Valid drive values are A and a Using any other drive value returns an error TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 111 Command Descriptions NOTE The oscilloscope reads the internal structure of the Compact Flash card or the USB flash drive every time the card is inserted The time to complete the read depends on the size of the card and how it was formatted To significantly shorten the initial read time of 64 MB and larger cards format the card or flash drive as FAT32 with your pe
169. lated TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax POWer AC PRESENt Returns 0 if the oscilloscope is being powered by battery 1 if the oscilloscope is being powered by AC Examples POWER AC PRESENT Might return 0 specifying that the oscilloscope is being powered by its battery POWer BATTERY lt x gt GASgauge Query Only TPS2000 Series Only Returns the amount of charge remaining in Battery x where x is Battery 1 or Battery 2 This command is valid only if POWer BATTERY lt x gt STATUS returns NORMAL Group Power and Battery Related Syntax POWer BATTERY lt x gt GASgauge Returns lt NR1 gt a number between 0 and 100 indicates the charge remaining in the battery 0 indicates the battery is fully discharged 100 indicates the battery is fully charged Examples POWER BATTERY1 GASgauge Might return 60 specifying that battery 1 is 60 charged TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 177 Command Descriptions POWer BATTERY lt x gt STATUS Query Only TPS2000 Series Only Returns the status of battery x where x is Battery 1 or Battery 2 Group Power and Battery Related Syntax POWer BATTERY lt x gt STATUS Returns FULL indicates that the battery is fully charged DISCHARGED indicates that the battery has no charge remaining The battery can be discharged but still report a small percent remaining UNCALI
170. les AUTORANGE STATE ON Starts the Autorange function AUTORANGE STATE Returns 0 or 1 depending on whether or not the Autorange function is on Related Commands AUTORange SETTings TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 53 Command Descriptions AUTORange SETTings TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 54 Controls the parameters that the Autorange function can adjust It is equivalent to the option buttons in the Autorange menu Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTORange SETTings HORizontal VERTical BOTH AUTORange SETTings Arguments HORizontal allows Autorange to adjust the horizontal but not vertical settings VERTical allows Autorange to adjust the vertical but not horizon tal settings BOTH allows Autorange to adjust both the horizontal and vertical settings Examples AUTORANGE SETTINGS VERTICAL Turns on the Autorange vertical settings AUTORANGE SETTINGS Might return VERTICAL indicating that Autorange will only adjust the vertical settings Related Commands AUTORange STATE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions AUTOSet Set Only Causes the oscilloscope to adjust its vertical horizontal and trigger controls to display a stable waveform This command is equivalent to pushing the front panel AUTOSET button For a detailed description of the Autoset function refer to the user manual for your osci
171. letion of a single sequence acquisition use the OPC query Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger STATE Returns ARMED indicates that the oscilloscope is acquiring pretrigger information All triggers are ignored when TRIGger STATE is ARMed READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and the oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger TRIGGER indicates that the oscilloscope has seen a trigger and is acquiring the posttrigger information AUTO indicates that the oscilloscope is in auto mode and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger SAVE indicates that acquisition is stopped or that all channels are off SCAN indicates that the oscilloscope is in scan mode Examples TRIGger STATE Might return READY indicating that pretrigger data has been acquired and the oscilloscope is waiting for a trigger TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 239 Command Descriptions Related Commands OPC TST Query Only Self Test Tests the GPIB interface and always returns a 0 Group Miscellaneous Syntax TST Returns 0 UNLock Set Only 2 240 Unlocks the front panel This command is equivalent to LOCk NONe NOTE If the oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State RWLS the UNLock command has no effect For more information refer to ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation section 2 8 3 on RL State desc
172. line feed CRLF carriage return followed by a line feed or LFCR line feed followed by a carriage return When receiving the oscilloscope accepts all four combinations as valid input message terminators regardless of the currently selected terminator When a combination of multiple characters is selected CRLF or LFCR the oscilloscope interprets the first character as the terminator and the second character as a null command Constructed Mnemonics Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics For example a channel mnemonic could be CH2 You can use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic For example there is a CH1 VOLts command and there is also a CH2 VOLts command In the command descriptions this list of choices is abbreviated CH lt x gt Channel Mnemonics Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header Symbol CH lt x gt Meaning 2 channel models A channel specifier lt x gt is 1 or 2 4 channel models A channel specifier lt x gt is 1 2 3 or 4 Reference Waveform Mnemonics Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Symbol REF lt x gt Meaning 2 channel models A reference waveform specifier lt x gt is Aor B 4 channel models A reference waveform specifier lt x gt is A B C or D TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 9 Command Syntax Waveform Mnemonics
173. lloscope Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTOSet EXECute Arguments EXECute invokes Autoset AUTOSet ENABLE TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only Allows educators to disable or enable the Autorange and Autoset functions The function can be manually set from the Service Diag menu To access the menu refer to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B series service manual Group Miscellaneous AUTOSet SIGNAL Query Only TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Returns the type of signal discovered by the most recent execution of Autoset TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 55 Command Descriptions Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTOSet SIGNAL Returns Might return LEVEL SINE SQUARE VIDPAL VIDNTSC OTHER l NONe LEVEL if the oscilloscope discovered a DC level SINE if the oscilloscope discovered a sine like waveform SQUARE if the oscilloscope discovered a square like waveform VIDPAL if the oscilloscope discovered a PAL or SECAM standard video signal VIDNTSC if the oscilloscope discovered an NTSC standard video signal OTHER if the oscilloscope was unable to classify the signal NONE if the AUTOSET menu is not displayed AUTOSet VIEW TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 56 If the current menu is not the Autoset menu or if the view is not valid for the detected waveform the set command causes the oscilloscope to generat
174. lloscope to a known set of oscilloscope settings but does not purge any stored settings This command executes a subset of the FACtory command Group Status and Error Syntax RST Sending the RST command does the following m Returns the oscilloscope settings to the factory defaults refer to Appendix B Factory Setup m Sets the macro defined by DDT to a zero length field m Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations The RST command does not alter the following items m State of the RS 232 GPIB or USB interface m Calibration data that affects device specifications m Current GPIB oscilloscope address m Stored settings or waveforms m Output queue m Service Request Enable Register settings m Standard Event Status Enable Register settings m Power On Status Clear flag setting m Hard copy parameters m Response Header Enable State m Front panel LOCK state m Verbose State m Display Brightness TPS2000 series only TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions m Display Contrast TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only Related Commands FACtory PSC RCL RECAII SETUp SAV SAVe SETUp SAV Set Only Save Stores the state of the oscilloscope into a specified nonvola tile memory location You can later use the RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state This is equivalent to selecting the Save Setup option in the S
175. lons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands refer to page 2 6 The sequence must be lt 80 characters lt Block gt format is always returned as a query response Examples DDT 217ACQuire STATE RUN lt EOI gt Specifies that the acquisition system will be started each time a TRG command is sent Related Commands TRG Sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The DESER is the mask that determines whether or not events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register SESR and entered into the Event Queue Refer to the Status and Events chapter on page 3 1 for more information Group Status and Error TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax DESE lt NR1 gt DESE Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer value in the range from 0 to 255 The binary bits of DESER are set according to this value For example DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 that is the most significant bit in the register is set to 1 the next most significant bit to 1 the next bit to 0 and so on The power on default for DESER is all bits set to 1 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the DESER maintains its value through a power cycle NOTE Setting DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the ESE command to set ESER
176. loscope to display the waveform as an FFT waveform NOTE For TDS200 oscilloscopes used with a TDS2CMA commu nications module the set form is ignored The query form returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by DATa SOURCce If the waveform specified by DATa SOURCce is not displayed the query generates event message 2244 Group Waveform TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 253 Command Descriptions Syntax WFMPre XUNit lt qstring gt WFMPre XUNit Arguments lt qstring gt is s or Hz WFMPre XZEro 2 254 The set form of this command specifies the position in XUNits of the first sample of the reference waveform specified by the DATa DESTination command relative to the trigger The query form returns the position of the first sample of the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command if that waveform is active or displayed If that waveform is not active or displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244 waveform requested is not active The oscilloscope sets WFMPre XZEro to zero when m The display mode is set to XY m The DATa SOUrce is set to MATH FFT when the waveform is acquired NOTE The oscilloscope uses XZEro when calculating cursor readouts Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre XZEro lt NR3 gt WFMPre XZEro TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptio
177. loscope uses one 8 bit data byte to represent each waveform data point regardless of the acquisition mode The DATa WIDth command lets you specify the number of bytes per data point when transferring data to and from an oscilloscope This provides compatibility with other digitizing oscilloscopes When DATa WIDth is set to two m If sending data the oscilloscope multiplies each point by 256 the most significant byte then has meaningful data and the least significant byte is 0 m If receiving data the oscilloscope truncates the data divides by 256 and saves the most significant byte NOTE The oscilloscopes uses these methods to handle waveforms transmitted in ASCII or binary format 2 40 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format Use the DATa ENCdg command to specify one of the following formats ASCII data is represented by signed integer values The range of values depends on the byte width specified One byte wide data ranges from 128 to 127 Two byte wide data ranges from 32768 to 32767 Each data value requires two to seven characters This includes one character for the minus sign if the value is negative one to five ASCII characters for the waveform value and a comma to separate data points An example of an ASCII waveform data string follows CURVE lt space gt 110 109 110 110 109
178. loscopes provide PictBridge printer support through a USB Device port on the rear of the oscilloscope See the PictBridge commands on page 2 27 The HARDCopy FORMat is always Exif JPEG when printing to a PictBridge printer For TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes use the HARDCo py FORMat command to set the file format when saving an image to a USB flash drive or over USBTMC 2 118 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Hard copy Syntax HARDCopy FORMat BMP BUBBLEJet DESKJet DPU3445 DPU411 DPU412 EPSC60 EPSC80 EPSIMAGE EPSOn INTERLEAF JPEG LASERJet PCX RLE THINKjet TIFF HARDCopy FORMat Arguments BMP sets the hard copy output format to Microsoft Windows Bitmap format BUBBLEJet TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 series only sets the hard copy output format to Canon Bubblejet format DESKjet TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 series only sets the hard copy output format to HP DeskJet format DPU3445 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 series only DPU411 and DPU412 set the hard copy output format to Seiko formats EPSC60 sets the hard copy output to Epson C60 model printer format Available on TDS1000 and TDS2000 models with firmware versions 2 12 or greater two channel models or 4 12 or greater four channel models any firmware version with a TDS2CMA TDS2CMAX or TDS2MEM module installed or the TPS2000 series EPSC80 sets t
179. lt value is 10 Examples SWLoss TOFFSTART Might return 10 indicating that Switching Loss Turn on End is set to 10 Related Commands SWLoss TOFFEND SWLoss TONSTART SW Loss TONEND SWLoss LEVELS SWLoss TONSTART TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries a level on the falling edge of the voltage waveform TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 215 Command Descriptions The Turn On loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math waveform between the turn on start SWLoss TONSTART and turn on end SWLoss TONEND points Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss TONSTART lt NR1 gt SWLoss TONSTART Arguments lt NR1 gt in percent Default value is 90 Examples SWLoss TONSTART Might return 80 indicating that Switching Loss Turn on Start is set to 80 Related Commands SW Loss TONEND SW Loss TOFFSTART SW Loss TOFFEND SWLoss LEVELS SWLoss UNITs TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 216 Sets or queries the units for Switching Loss measurements Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss UNITs WATTS JOULES TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SWLoss UNITs Arguments WATTS sets the measurement units to Watts JOULES sets the measurement units to Joules Examples SWLoss UNITs Might return WATTS indicating that the current measurement units are Wat
180. mage to the file VID EVAL BMP in the folder A PROD TST on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Related Commands SAVe I MAge FILEFormat TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SAVe IMAge FILEFormat TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets the screen image file format used by the SAVe IMAGE command and by the SAVE gt Action gt Save Image and SAVE gt Action gt Save All front panel operations Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe IMAge FILEFormat BMP EPSIMAGE JPG PCX RLE TIFF Arguments BMP sets the screen image file format to Microsoft Windows Bitmap format EPSIMAGE sets the screen image file format to Postscript format JPG TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only sets the screen image file format to JPEG bitmap uses a lossy file compression algorithm PCX sets the screen image file format to DOS Paintbrush format RLE sets the screen image file format to Windows color image file format RLE Use RLE for faster transfer rates and smaller resulting files Many programs that recognize BMP files also recognize RLE files TIFF sets the screen image file format to Tagged Image File Format Examples SAVe IMAge FILEFormat TIFF Sets the screen image graphical file format to TIFF Related Commands SAVe IMAge TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Progra
181. mmand Groups File System Commands TDS2MEM Module TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Only File system commands perform file management tasks on the CompactFlash CF card of TPS2000 oscilloscopes and TDS models with a TDS2MEM module and on USB flash drives of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Table 2 12 lists these commands Table 2 12 File System commands Header Description FILESystem Return the current working directory CWD and CF card or USB flash drive free space values FILESystem CWD Set or query the current CF card or USB flash drive directory FILESystem DELEte Delete specified file on the CF card or USB flash drive FILESystem DIR Return a list of files in current CF card or USB flash drive directory FILESystem FORMat Format the CF card or USB flash drive FILESystem FREESpace Return free space on the CF card or USB flash drive FILESystem MKDir Create a new directory on the CF card or USB flash drive FILESystem REName Assign new name to specified file on the CF card or USB flash drive FILESystem RMDir Delete specified directory TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 19 Command Groups File System Conventions Use the following conventions when specifying file paths and file names m The default folder directory is A m File and folder names have a maximum of 11 characters eight characters followed by a period followed by up to three characters This format i
182. mmer 2 193 Command Descriptions SAVe SETUp Set Only 2 194 Saves the current state of the oscilloscope into the specified nonvolatile memory location or to a file on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only This is equivalent to selecting the Save Setup option in the Save Recall Setup menu Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe SETUp lt NR1 gt lt file path gt Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 TDS200 series or 1 to 10 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series and specifies a memory location Any settings that have been stored previously at this location are overwritten lt file path gt TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the setup file to save Use the extension SET for oscilloscope setup file names If you do not specify a path to a folder the TDS2MEM saves the setup file in the current working folder The current folder refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query Examples SAVe SETUp 5 Saves the current front panel setup to memory location 5 SAVe SETUp A PROD TST VID EVAL SET Saves the oscilloscope settings to the file VID EVAL SET in the folder A PROD TST on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series onl
183. mmer 2 231 Command Descriptions Arguments Positive polarity specifics pulses with a rising leading edge Negative polarity specifies pulses with a falling leading edge TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WHEN TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 232 Sets or queries the trigger conditions for the pulse trigger This is equivalent to setting the When option in the Pulse Trigger menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WHEN EQual NOTEqual INside OUTside TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WHEN Arguments EQual triggers on the trailing edge of pulses of the specified width NOTEQual triggers when a pulse s trailing edge occurs before the specified width or a pulse continues longer than the specified width without a trailing edge INside less than triggers on the trailing edge of any pulses that are narrower than the specified width OUTside greater than also called time out trigger triggers when a pulse continues longer that the specified width TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WIDth TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the width for the pulse trigger This is equivalent to setting the Width option by using the Pulse Trigger menu and the TRIGGER knob Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth WIDth
184. mplete before starting another Examples HARDCopy ABOrt Stops any hard copy output that is in process Related Commands WAI HARDCopy BUTTON TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or returns the current PRINT front panel button function NOTE This command does not affect the HARDCopy STARt command Group Hard copy Syntax HARDCopy BUTTON PRINTS SAVESA11 SAVESImage TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 117 Command Descriptions HARDCopy BUTTON Arguments PRINTS sets the PRINT button to send the screen image to the current printer port using the current printer format SAVESA11 sets the PRINT button to save all active oscilloscope information waveforms screen image settings to files in a new subfolder in the current CompactFlash card folder TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or in the current USB flash drive folder TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only SAVESImage sets the PRINT button to save the screen image to a file on the CompactFlash card or on the USB flash drive Examples HARDCopy BUTTON SAVESImage Sets the front panel PRINT button to save the screen image to a file when pushed HARDCopy FORMat Sets the hard copy output data format This command is the same as setting the Format option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Hard Copy or Printer Setup menu depending on your oscilloscope model NOTE The TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscil
185. n 2 0E 6 Sets the window position to 2 us before the center graticule HORizontal DELay POSition Might return 1 0E 3 indicating that the window position is 1 ms after the center graticule TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 135 Command Descriptions HORizontal DELay SCAle 2 136 Sets the time per division for the oscilloscope window time base This command is equivalent to setting SEC DIV when Window Zone or Window is selected from the Horizontal menu Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DELay SCAle lt NR3 gt HORizontal DELay SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the time per division The range depends on the oscillo scope model The acceptable values are in a 1 2 5 5 sequence If the window time base scale is set slower than the main time base scale both the main and window time base scales are set to the window scale value Examples HORizontal DELay SCAle 2 0E 6 Sets the window scale to 2 us per division HORizontal DELay SCAle 9 0E 6 Sets the window scale to 10 us per division Since 9 us is not a correct value within the 1 2 5 5 sequence it is automatically set to the closest correct value HORizontal DELay SCAle Might return 1 0E 3 indicating that the window scale is 1 ms per division TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions HORizontal DELay SECdiv This command is identical to the HORizontal DELay SCAle It is provid
186. nalysis Module Only Returns the amplitude of the selected harmonic as a percent of the fundamental Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics PERCent Examples HARmonics PERCent Might return 5 0 indicating that the amplitude of the selected harmonic as a percent of the fundamental frequency is 5 0 Related Commands HARmonics SELect HARmonics PHAse Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 126 Returns the phase of the selected harmonic in degrees relative to the fundamental Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics PHAse TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Examples HARmonics PHAse Might return 45 0 indicating that the phase of the selected harmonic relative to the fundamental frequency is 45 degrees Related Commands HARmonics SELect HARmonics RMS Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the amplitude of the harmonics source in RMS This may be Vims OF Irms depending on the type of source waveform Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics RMS Examples HARmonics RMS Might return 120 0 indicating that the RMS value is 120 volts RMS HARmonics SAVe Set Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets the file name and path to save the selected waveform harmonic data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card in CSV format The following d
187. nctions Series Port location Port function TDS200 TDS2CM TDS2CMA or TDS2CMAX RS 232 Centronics GPIB Communications TDS2MM Math TDS1000 TDS2CMA or TDS2CMAX RS 232 Centronics GPIB TDS2000 TDS2MEM Storage Memory and RS 232 Centronics CompactFlash Communications TDS1000B Back of oscilloscope USB Device 10920008 GPIB with a TEK USB 488 adapter TPS2000 Back of oscilloscope RS 232 Centronics TDS1001 and TDS2004 are not compatible with the TDS2MEM module t Install the PC Communications software from the CD that came with the oscilloscope first refer to your TDS1000B and TDS2000B user manual for information on installing the software After the software is installed then connect the oscilloscope to a PC TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 1 1 Getting Started Refer to your oscilloscope user manual Tektronix part numbers listed on page v for information on how to install test and configure your oscilloscope and module NOTE The firmware for the TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series oscilloscopes includes communications math and storage memory functions Table 1 2 Oscilloscope extension module and adapter compatibility TDS2CM TDS2CMA Series or TDS2CMAX TDS2MM TDS2MEM TEK USB 488 TDS200 Yes No fno TDS1000 or No Yes No TDS2000 TDS1000B or No No No Yes TDS2000B Teszoot No No No NG TDS1001 and TDS2004 models are not compatible with the TDS2M
188. nd is equivalent to setting the Image Size option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup gt PRINT Button gt Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge IMAGESIZE DEFLT IN2P5BY3P25 L IN4BY6 L2 IN8BY10 L4 E CARD HAGAKIPC CM6BY8 CM7BY10 CM9BY13 CM10BY15 CM13BY18 CM15BY21 CM18BY24 A4 LETTER PICTBridge IMAGESIZE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments DEFLT specifies the default size of the image to print All image size arguments are valid as long as the paper size can accommodate the image The paper size should be larger than the image size Examples PICTBridge IMAGESIZE Might return LETTER as the size of the image to print PICTBridge PAPERTYPE TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only Sets the type of paper from those available on the compatible printer This command is equivalent to setting the Paper Type option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup gt PRINT Button gt Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge PAPERTYPE DEFLT PLAIN PHOTO FASTPHOTO PICTBridge PAPERTYPE Arguments DEFLT specifies the type of paper used by default in the printer Examples PICTBridge PAPERTYPE Might return PLAIN as the paper type TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 173 Command Descripti
189. nder test using the SWLoss VSAT command This command returns an immediate measurement value that does not depend of the current oscilloscope menu TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss VALue TURNOFF Returns lt NR3 gt Gyainples SWLoss VALue TURNOFF Might return SWLoss VALue TURNON TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning between its off and on state You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the SWLoss VSAT command This command returns an immediate measurement value that does not depend of the current oscilloscope menu Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss VALue TURNON Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss VALue TURNON Might return TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 219 Command Descriptions SWLoss VSAT TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only TiMe Sets or queries the saturation voltage for the device under test Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss VSAT lt NR3 gt SWLoss VSAT Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the saturation voltage Examples SWLoss VSAT Might return 4 800000667572E0 indicating that the saturation voltage is set to 4 80 volts TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 220
190. nnel instruments MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math waveform TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only Examples MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce CH1 Specifies channel 1 as the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Sets or queries the secondary source for dual source immediate measurements For example power analysis and phase angle measurements NOTE This command is only available when the Power Analysis Module application key is installed TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 157 Command Descriptions Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 CH lt x gt MATH MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 Arguments CH lt x gt specifies the measurement source channel as one of the input channels The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments For power analysis Source2 must be Amperes MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math waveform Examples MEASUrement IMMed SOURCE2 CH2 Specifies channel 2 as the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 2 158 Sets or queries the immediate measurement type NOTE Selecting one of the power arguments for this command without installing the Power Analysis Module application key will generate an error Group Measurement Syntax
191. ns Arguments lt NR3 gt is the position in XUNits of the first waveform sample WFMPre YMUIt YMUIt is a value expressed in YUNits per digitizer level used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is digitizer levels value_in_YUNits curve_in_dl YOFF_in_dl YMUIt YZERO_in_YUNits The set form of this command sets the vertical scale factor of the reference waveform specified by the DATa DESTination command expressed in YUNits per digitizing level The query form returns a value for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command if that waveform is active or displayed If that waveform is not active or displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244 waveform requested is not active Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre YMU1t lt NR3 gt WFMPre YMU1t Arguments lt NR3 gt is the vertical scale factor in YUNits usually volts per sample value Returns A query result of zero has special meaning A zero indicates the waveform has unknown vertical scaling TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B or TDS2000B series TPS2000 series will never return zero TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 255 Command Descriptions An example of unknown vertical scaling is a math waveform of CH1 CH2 where CH1 vertical scaling is different from CH2 vertical scaling In this case WFMPre YUNit retur
192. ns U Does not apply to the TPS2000 series WFMPre YOFf 2 256 YOFf is a value expressed in digitizer levels used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is digitizer levels value_in_YUNits curve_in_d YOFF_in_dl YMUIt YZERO_in_YUNits The set form of this command stores a value for the reference waveform specified by the DATa DESTination command This value does not affect how the oscilloscope displays the waveform but does affect the cursor readouts The query form returns a value for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command in digitizer levels if that waveform is active or displayed If that waveform is not active or displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244 waveform requested is not active Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre YOFf lt NR3 gt WFMPre YOF f Arguments lt NR3 gt is a value expressed in digitizing levels TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions WFMPre YUNit For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS200 series with a TDS2CMA communications module or a TDS2MM measurement module the set form of this command sets the vertical units for the reference waveform specified by DATa DESTination NOTE It is possible to set a combination of WFMPre XUNit and WFMPre YUNit for a reference waveform that is inconsistent for ex
193. ns a null string This command is the easiest way for a program to check for the presence of a CompactFlash card or a USB flash drive Examples FILESystem CWD A MYDIR Sets the current working folder to MYDIR FILESystem CWD Might return FILESYSTEM CWD A PROD TST if PROD TST is the current working folder TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 109 Command Descriptions FILESystem DELEte Set Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Deletes the specified file name from the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or from the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Group File system Syntax FILESystem DELEte lt file path gt Arguments lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the folder path and file name of the file to delete The root directory is A You cannot use an asterisk wild card character to delete multiple files For example FILESYSTEM DELETE A PROD TST SET is not valid Examples FILESystem DELEte A PROD TST 1ST RUN TESTFREQ SET Deletes the setup file TESTFREQ SET from the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or from the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Related Commands FILESystem RMDir FILESystem DIR Query Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 110 Returns a list of strings Each string contains the name of a file or folder in the current work
194. nt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 155 Command Descriptions Syntax MEASUrement Returns Oscilloscope measurement settings Examples MEASUrement Might return the following MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE PERIOD UNITS s SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE FREQUENCY UNITS Hz SOURCE CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE PK2PK UNITS V SOURCE CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE MEAN UNITS V SOURCE CH2 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE CRMS UNITS V SOURCE CH1 MEASUrement IMMed Query Only 2 156 Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters Immediate queries and commands are the preferred methods for programming An immediate measurement selection is not visible or accessible through the display screen or front panel Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed Returns Immediate measurement setup parameters Examples MEASUrement IMMed Might return PERIOD s CH1 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce1 Sets or queries the source for single source immediate measure ments Group Measurement Syntax TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series MEASUrement IMMed SOUrcel CH lt x gt MATH MEASUrement IMMed SOUrcel Arguments CH lt x gt specifies the measurement source channel as one of the input channels The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 cha
195. ntal units WFMPre XZEro Set or query the time of first point in waveform WFMPre YMUIt Set or query the vertical scale factor WFMPre YOFf Set or query the vertical offset WFMPre YUNit Set or query the vertical units WFMPre YZEro Set or query the waveform conversion TDS200 with TDS2MM module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only WFMPre lt wim gt WFMPre lt wim gt NR_Pt _Fmt WFMPre lt wim gt PT_Fmt WFMPre lt wim gt PT_Off WFMPre lt wim gt WFld WFMPre lt wim gt XINcr WFMPre lt wim gt XUNit WFMPre lt wim gt XZEro TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer factor Return waveform formatting data Return the number of points in the transmitted waveform record Set or query the format of curve points Query the trigger offset Query the waveform identifier Set or query the horizontal sampling interval Set or query the horizontal units Set or query the time of first data point in waveform 2 39 Command Groups Table 2 26 Waveform commands Cont Header Description WFMPre lt wim gt YMUIt Set or query the vertical scale factor WFMPre lt wfm gt YOFf Set or query the vertical position WFMPre lt wfm gt YUNit Set or query the vertical units WFMPre lt wim gt YZEro Set or query the waveform conversion TDS200 with TDS2MM module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 only factor Waveform Data Formats Internally the oscil
196. nts ERRLOG FIRST Query Only Returns the first entry in the error log or an empty string if the error log is empty Use this command along with ERRLOG NEXT to retrieve error log messages Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax ERRLOG FIRST Returns Refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope for information about error log message format ERRLOG NEXT Query Only 2 102 Returns the next entry in the error log or an empty string if the error log is empty or you have reached the end of the log To start at the top of the error log run the ERRLOG FIRST query to return the first error log message Then use the ERRLOG NEXT query to step through the error log Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax ERRLOG NEXT TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions ESE Returns Refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope for information about error log message format Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register STB Refer to the Status and Events chapter on page 3 1 for more information Group Status and Error Syntax ESE lt NR1 gt ESE Arguments lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 0 through 255 The binary bits of the ESER are set according to this value The power on default for ESER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the ESER maintains its valu
197. nts 1 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1X attenuation 10 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 10X attenuation 20 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 20X attenuation TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only 50 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 50X attenuation TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only 100 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 100X attenuation 500 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 500X attenuation TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only 1000 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1000X attenuation Returns lt NR1 gt Examples CH2 PRObe 1000 Sets channel 2 to 1000X attenuation CH1 PRObe Might return CH1 PROBE 10 CH lt x gt SCAle Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified oscilloscope channel The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments This command is equivalent to adjusting the front panel VOLTS DIV knob TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 69 Command Descriptions Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the gain in volts or amps per division For example the voltage range is 5 V div to 2 mV div when using a 1X voltage probe Examples CH1 SCAle 100E 3 Sets the channel 1 gain to 100 mV div CH2 SCAle Might return 1 0E0 indicating that the current
198. nts menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes NOTE The HARDCopy BUTTON HARDCopy INKSaver and HARDCopy LAYOUT commands apply to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Refer to page 2 117 for descriptions Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge DEF Examples PICTBridge DEF Sets the parameters for the compatible printer to the default values PICTBridge PAPERSIZE TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only Sets the paper size of the hard copy from those available on the compatible printer This command is equivalent to setting the Paper Size option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup gt PRINT Button gt Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Group PictBridge TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 171 Command Descriptions Syntax PICTBridge PAPERSIZE DEFLT L L2 HAGAKIPCARD MM54BY86 MM1OOBY150 IN4BY6 IN8BY10 LETTER IN11BY17 AO Al A2 A3 A4 A5 AG A7 AB A9 BO B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 ROLL89MM ROLL127MM ROLL100MM ROLL210MM PICTBridge PAPERSIZE Arguments DEFLT specifies the default paper size of the printer Any paper size argument is valid when the paper is available for the printer Examples PICTBridge PAPERSIZE Might return LETTER as the selected paper size for the printer PICTBridge IMAGESIZE TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only 2 172 Sets the size of the image to print This comma
199. ommands This means that some operations are not completed in the order that they were sent There may be times when the result of an operation is dependent on the result of an earlier one and you must be assured that the first operation has completed before processing the next one The status and event reporting system provides ways to do this For example a typical application would be to acquire a single se quence waveform and then take a measurement on the acquired waveform You could use the following command sequence Set up single sequence acquisition SELECT CH1 ON ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement 2 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PK2PK MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Take peak to peak measurement on acquired data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time and may not complete before the amplitude measurement is taken See Figure 3 7 This will result in an incorrect peak to peak value 3 10 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Processing Time Figure 3 7 Command processing without using synchronization The acquisition of the waveform must be completed before the measurement can be taken on the acquired data This i
200. ommands TPS2000 only Header Description POWer Return all power parameters POWer AC PRESENt Return whether the oscilloscope is being POWer BATTERY lt x gt GASgauge powered by battery or AC Return the charge remaining in battery x POWer BATTERY lt x gt STATUS Return status for battery x POWer BATTERIES TIME POWer BUTTONLIGHT Return the time remaining in both batteries Turn the lighted front panel buttons on and off Power Measurement TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application Key Installed Only Power Measurement commands provide power measurements to a TPS2000 oscilloscope with the TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis application software key installed Table 2 20 lists and describes Power Measurement commands 2 28 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 20 Power Measurement commands TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 only Header Description HARmonics Return all harmonic parameters HARmonics ENABle Set or query the harmonics menu on and off HARmonics FREquency Return the frequency of the selected harmonic HARmonics HRMS Return the frequency of the selected harmonic HARmonics PERCent Return the amplitude of the selected harmonic as a percent of the fundamental HARmonics PHAse Return the phase of the selected harmonic in degrees relative to the fundamental HARmonics RMS Return the amplitude of the harmonics source in RMS units This
201. on polarity for the video trigger TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SOUrce 2 236 Sets or queries the source for the video trigger This is equivalent to selecting the Source option in the Video trigger menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SOUrce CH lt x gt EXT EXT5 EXT10 TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SOUrce Arguments CH lt x gt specifies one of the allowable input channels The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments EXT specifies the external input not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions EXT5 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 5 not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes EXT10 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 10 TPS2000 series only Examples TRIGger MAIn VIDeo SOUrce CH1 Selects channel 1 as the source for the main video trigger TRIGger MAIn VIDeo STANDard TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the video trigger standard This is equivalent to selecting the Standard option in the Trigger Video menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn VIDeo STANDard NTSc PAL TRIGger MAIn VIDeo STANdard Arguments NTSC default specifies the NTSC video standard PAL specifies the PAL or SECAM video standard Examples TRIGger MAIn VIDeo STANdard NTSC Selects the
202. on settings Group Acquisition TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 45 Command Descriptions Syntax ACQuire Returns Returns current acquisition settings Examples ACQuire Might return the following string for the current acquisition ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMAVG 16 ACQuire MODe 2 46 Sets or queries the oscilloscope acquisition mode This affects all live waveforms and is equivalent to setting the Mode option in the Acquire menu Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals Each acquisition interval represents a time duration that is determined by the horizontal scale time per division The oscilloscope sampling system can operate at a rate greater than that indicated by the horizontal scale Therefore an acquisition interval can include more than one sample The acquisition mode which you set using this ACQuire MODe command determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire MODe SAMple PEAKdetect AVErage ACQuire MODe TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value that was taken during the acquisition interval The waveform data has 8 bits of precision in all acquisition modes You can request 16 bit
203. onics measurement on or off Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics ENABle ON OFF HARmonics ENAB1e Arguments ON causes the oscilloscope to display the harmonics menu and turn on Harmonics analysis OFF causes the oscilloscope to display the CH1 menu Examples HARmonics ENABLe ON Causes the oscilloscope to display the harmonics menu HARmonics ENABLe Might return OFF indicating that the harmonics menu is turned off HARmonics FREquency Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the frequency of the selected harmonic 2 124 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmonics FREquency Returns lt NR3 gt Examples HARmonics FREquency Might return 3 60576923E2 indicating that the frequency of the selected harmonic is 360 57 Hz Related Commands HARmonics SELect HARmonics HRMS Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the RMS amplitude of the selected harmonic in the same units as the source waveform Group Power Measurement Syntax HARmon i cs HRMS Returns lt NR3 gt Examples HARmon i cs HMRS Might return 6 18267221409E 1 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 125 Command Descriptions Related Commands HARmonics SELect HARmonics PERCent Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power A
204. ons PICTBridge PRINTQUAL TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only Sets the quality of the print from those available on the compatible printer This command is equivalent to setting the Print Quality option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup gt PRINT Button gt Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge PRINTQUAL DEFLT NRMAL FINE DRAFT PICTBridge PRINTQUAL Arguments DEFLT specifies the quality of the hard copy used by default on the printer NRMAL prints a normal quality hard copy FINE prints a high quality hard copy DRAFT prints a low quality hard copy Examples PICTBridge PRINTQUAL Might return DRAFT as the quality of the print PICTBridge DATEPRINT TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only 2 174 Sets the date and time to be printed on the hard copy if the feature is available on the compatible printer This command is equivalent to setting the Date Print option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup gt PRINT Button gt Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge DATEPRINT DEFLT OFF ON PICTBridge DATEPRINT Arguments DEFLT will match the default setting of the printer on or off ON prints the date and time on the hard copy OFF does not print the date and time Examples PICTBridge DATEPRINT
205. or menu Group Cursor Syntax CURSor SELect SOUrce lt wfm gt CURSor SELect SOUrce Arguments lt wfm gt specifies the waveform data source on which cursor measurements will be taken TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 77 Command Descriptions Examples CURSor SELect SOUrce CH1 Selects channel 1 CURSor SELect SOUrce Might return MATH CURSor VBArs Query Only Returns the current vertical bar cursor horizontal position and units settings Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs Examples CURSor VBArs Might return CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION1 1 00E 6 POSITION2 9 00E 6 CURSor VBArs DELTa Query Only 2 78 Returns the time or frequency difference between the two vertical bar cursors The units seconds or Hertz are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command If the cursor source is an FFT math waveform CURSor VBArs DELTa is always in Hertz regardless of the value set by CURSor VBArs UNIts NOTE If Trigger View is active this query returns 9 9E37 and generates event 221 Settings conflict TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs DELTa Returns lt NR3 gt Examples CURSor VBArs DELTa Might return 8 92E 1 indicating that the time difference between the vertical bar cursors is 0 892 seconds CURSor VBArs HDELTa Query Only TDS1000B TDS2000B and T
206. orm transfer process Group Waveform Syntax CURVe lt Block gt lt asc curve gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions DATa CURVe Arguments lt Block gt is the waveform data in binary format The waveform is formatted as lt x gt lt yyy gt lt data gt where lt x gt is the number of characters in lt yyy gt For example if lt yyy gt 500 then lt x gt 3 where lt yyy gt is the number of bytes to transfer Refer to Block Arguments on page 2 13 for more information If width is 1 then all bytes on the bus are single data points If width is 2 then all bytes on the bus are 2 byte pairs Use the DATa WIDth command to set the width lt data gt is the curve data lt asc curve gt is the waveform data in ASCII format The format for ASCII data is lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt where each lt NR1 gt represents a data point Examples CURVe Might return the following ASCII data CURVE 13 6 3 2 1 9 14 19 29 35 67 1 78 62 50 31 27 7 0 12 29 39 45 43 41 47 41 38 33 26 Related Commands DATa WFMPre Sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command Since DATa DESTination and DATa TARget are equivalent only DATa DESTination is returned by the DATa query Group Waveform Syntax DATa INIT TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 85 Command De
207. oses a default black on white display ON chooses a white on black display Examples DISplay INVert Might return OFF DiSplay PERSistence 2 100 Sets the length of time that data points are displayed Group Display Syntax DISplay PERSistence 1 2 5 INF OFF TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions DISplay PERSistence Arguments 1 2 5 specifies the length in seconds that the waveform points are displayed on the screen INF specifies infinite persistence OFF specifies that persistence is turned off Returns 0 means that the persistence is turned off 2 or 5 means that the persistence is set to two or five seconds 99 means that the persistence is set to infinite Examples DISplay PERSistence 5 Specifies that the waveform points are displayed on the screen for five seconds before they fade DiSplay STYle Selects how to display the waveform data This command is equivalent to setting the Type option in the Display menu Group Display Syntax DISplay STYle DOTs VECtors DISplay STYle Arguments DOTs displays individual data points VECtors connects adjacent data points TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 101 Command Descriptions Examples DISplay STYle VEC Sets the display to connect adjacent data points DISplay STYle Might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual waveform data poi
208. pe s internal factory calibration operation The calibration operation consists of a sequence of steps You send the CALibrate CONTINUE command to advance to the next calibration step The calibration program automatically sets up the oscilloscope for each calibration step Use the CALibrate ABOrt command to abort the factory calibration TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions You can only send synchronization commands or queries such as OPC OPC WAI BUSY while doing a factory calibration Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate FACtory Examples CALibrate FACtory Starts the factory calibration process CALibrate INTERNAL Set Only Performs an internal self calibration but does not return any status This is equivalent to selecting the Do Self Cal option in the Utility menu NOTE The self calibration can take several minutes to complete During this time the oscilloscope does not execute any commands Disconnect all signals from the oscilloscope before performing an internal self calibration Syntax CALibrate INTERNAL Examples CALibrate INTERNAL Performs an internal self calibration Related Commands CAL TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 61 Command Descriptions CALibrate STATUS Query Only Returns the status of the last calibration operation performed either self or factory calibration since powe
209. pe is slowed since it is processing a single command at a time This time could be spent doing other tasks The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer but the commands are not processed by the oscilloscope until all operations in process are complete If the input buffer becomes full the controller will be unable to write any more commands to the buffer and will result in a time out 3 12 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events Using the BUSY Query BUSY allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as single sequence acquisition The same command sequence using BUSY for synchronization follows Set up single sequence acquisition SELECT CH1 ON ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PK2PK MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement While BUSY keep looping Take peak to peak measurement on acquired data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the WAI command An advantage to using BUSY is that you eliminate the possibility of a time out caused by writing too many commands to the input buffer The controller is still tied up though and
210. ples SWLoss AVErage TOTAL Might return 9 1715589532E 2 SWLoss AVErage TURNOFF Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning between its on and off state The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg column of the Switching Loss display You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the SWLoss VSAT command TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 203 Command Descriptions NOTE This command returns error 221 settings conflict if the Switching Loss menu is not active Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss AVErage TURNOFF Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss AVErage TURNOFF Might return 1 3790115628E 2 SWLoss AVErage TURNON Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 204 Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning between its off and on state The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg column of the Switching Loss display You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the SWLoss VSAT command NOTE This command returns error 221 settings conflict if the Switching Loss menu is not active Group Power Measurement TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Syntax SWLoss AVErage TURNON
211. power on clear and allows the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power on lt NR1 gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag true Sending PSC 1 therefore enables the power on status clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on Examples PSC 0 Sets the power on status clear flag to false PSC Might return the value 1 showing that the power on status clear flag is set to true Related Commands DESE ESE FACtory RST SRE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 181 Command Descriptions RCL Set Only Restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of its settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command This command is equivalent to RECAII SETUp and performs the same function as the Recall Saved Setup item in the front panel Save Recall Setup menu Group Save and Recall Syntax RCL lt NR1 gt Arguments lt NR1 gt is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 TDS200 series or 1 to 10 TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series and specifies a setup storage location Examples RCL 3 Restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory location 3 Related Commands FACtory LRN RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp RECAII SETUp Set Only 2 182 Restores a stored or factory front panel setup of the oscilloscope from internal nonvolatile memory or from a file on the Compact Flash card
212. ppendix A 2 Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string this is a valid string 3 You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the previous rule this is an acceptable string TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Syntax 4 You can include a quote character within a string simply by repeating the quote For example here is a mark 5 Strings can have upper or lower case characters 6 If you use a GPIB network you cannot terminate a quoted string with the END message before the closing delimiter 7 A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate the string but is treated as just another character in the string 8 The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000 characters Here are some examples of invalid strings Invalid string argument quotes are not of the same type test lt E0I gt termination character is embedded in the string Block Arguments Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form Table 2 7 lists and describes each part of a block argument Table 2 7 Parts of a block argument Symbol Meaning lt NZDig gt A non zero digit character in the range 1 9 Specifies the number of lt Dig gt elements that follow lt Dig gt A digit character in the range 0 9 lt DChar gt A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through FF hexadecimal 0 t
213. ptions Related Commands DISplay INVert DISplay BRIGHTness DiSplay FORMat Sets or queries the oscilloscope display format This command is equivalent to setting the Format option in the Display menu Group Display Syntax DISplay FORMat XY YT DISplay FORMat Arguments XY displays the voltage of channel 1 horizontal axis against the voltage of channel 2 vertical axis NOTE Setting the display format to XY turns cursors off Sending the CURSor FUNCtion command when the display format is XY causes the oscilloscope to generate event 221 Settings conflict and leaves the display in XY format YT sets the display to vertical values versus time format and is the default mode Examples DISplay FORMat YT Selects a voltage versus time format for the display DISplay FORMat Might return XY for the display format TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 99 Command Descriptions DiSplay INVert Sets or queries the TDS1000 and TDS1000B display format This command is equivalent to setting the Display Style option in the Utility Options menu for the TDS1000 and TDS1000B series The TDS2000 TDS2000B and TPS2000 series do not have a Display Style option but accept the DISplay INVert command and query for compatibility The query always returns OFF The TDS200 series is not supported Group Display Syntax DISplay INVert ON OFF DISplay INVert Arguments OFF cho
214. r Command Descriptions Syntax CURSor HBArs DELTa Returns lt NR3 gt Examples CURSor HBArs DELTa Might return 5 08E0 for the difference between the two cursors CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Positions a horizontal bar cursor The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 2 NOTE If Trigger View is active the query form returns 9 9E37 and generates event 221 Settings conflict Group Cursor Syntax CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground in volts when the units are volts and amps when the units are amps relative to the center of the screen in divs when units are divisions or relative to 1 V RMS in decibels when the source is an FFT math waveform for the waveform specified by the CURSor SE Lect SOUrce command The cursor position is limited to the graticule whenever an attempt is made to move it outside the graticule TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 75 Command Descriptions NOTE The source always determines the measurement units Examples CURSor HBArs POSITION1 25 0E 3 Positions one of the horizontal cursors at 25 0 mV assuming the vertical units are volts CURSor HBArs POSITION2 Might return 6 40E 2 indicating that the second horizontal bar cursor is at 64 0 mV assuming the vertical units are volts
215. r Command Groups Table 2 25 Vertical commands Cont Header CH lt x gt INVert All oscilloscope firmware version and module combinations except TDS210 and TDS220 with firmware Description Set or query the channel invert below V 2 00 and a TDS2CMA communications module CH lt x gt POSition Set or query the channel position CH lt x gt PRObe Set or query the channel probe parame ters CH lt x gt SCAle Set or query the channel volts div CH lt x gt VOLts Same as CH lt x gt SCAle CH lt x gt YUNit Set or query the units of the specified TDS1000B TDS2000B and channel TPS2000 only SELect Controls the display of waveforms SELect lt wfm gt Set or query the waveform display state Waveform Commands Waveform commands let you transfer waveform data points to and from the oscilloscope Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a waveform One data value usually represents one data point in the waveform record When working with peak detect waveforms each data value is either the min or max of a min max pair Before you can transfer waveform data you must specify the data format and waveform locations Table 2 26 lists and describes Waveform commands Refer to the text following this table for more information about waveform commands TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 37 Command Groups 2 38 Table 2 26 Waveform commands
216. r TDS200 or five TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 automated measurements In the commands these measurement readouts are named MEAS lt x gt where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 or 5 for TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 The best method for taking measurements over the computer interface is to use the MEASUREMENT IMMED commands and queries The immediate measurement has no front panel equivalent and the oscilloscope never displays immediate measurements TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 23 Command Groups 2 24 Because they are computed only when they are requested immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed measurements Use the VALue query to obtain measurement results of either displayed or immediate measurements Several measurement commands set and query measurement parameters You can assign some parameters such as waveform sources differently for each measurement readout Table 2 16 lists and describes Measurement commands Table 2 16 Measurement commands Header Description MEASUrement Return all measurement parameters MEASUrement IMMed Return immediate measurement param eters MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce1 Set or query the channel for immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Set or query the channel for two source immediate measurements TPS2000 with Power Analysis Module only MEASUrement IMMed
217. r there are advantages to using this method in some situations For more information refer to Using the OPC Set Command on page 3 14 Table 2 30 lists commands that generate an Operation Complete message TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 169 Command Descriptions Table 2 30 Commands that generate an Operation Complete message Command CAL CALibrate CONTINUE CALIbrate FACtory CALIbrate INTERNAL Operation Internal self calibration ACQuire STATE ON or ACQuire STATE RUN when ACQuire STOPAfter is set to SEQuence HARDCopy STARt Busy single sequence acquisition Busy hard copy output Group Status and Error Syntax OPC OPC Examples Using the OPC query to check for the completion of the single sequence acquisition ACQuire STOPAfter SEQUENCE ACQuire STATE ON OPC will return a 1 after the acquisition is complete Refer to page 3 14 for examples of how to use the OPC set command Related Commands ALLEv BUSY DESE ESR WAI 2 170 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions PICTBridge DEF Set Only TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only Sets the arguments for all PictBridge commands to their default values The default values are the same as the default settings for the printer This command is equivalent to setting all the options to default in the UTILITY gt Options gt Printer Setup gt PRINT Button gt Pri
218. r up Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate STATUS Returns PASS indicates that the oscilloscope completed the last calibration operation without detecting any errors FAIL indicates that the oscilloscope detected errors during the last calibration operation or that no calibration operations have been performed since power up Examples CALibrate STATUS Might return CALIBRATE STATUS FAIL if the oscilloscope failed the last calibration operation CH lt x gt Query Only 2 62 Returns the current oscilloscope vertical settings The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments Because CH lt x gt SCAle and CH lt x gt VOLts are identical only CH lt x gt SCAle is returned Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Returns Oscilloscope vertical settings Examples CH1 Might return the following string for channel 1 CH1 SCALE 1 0E0 POSITION 0 0E0 COUPLING DC BANDWIDTH OFF PROBE 1 0E0 Related Commands SELect CH lt x gt CH lt x gt BANdwidth Sets or queries the bandwidth setting of the specified oscilloscope channel The value of lt x gt can vary from 1 through 4 for 4 channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2 channel instruments This command is equivalent to setting the BW Limit option in the Vertical menu Group Vertical Syntax
219. rement Syntax SWLoss LOG TOTAL Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss LOG TOTAL Might return 9 0796045959E 2 Related Commands SWLoss LOG INDEX SWLoss LOGCONDUCTION TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions SWLoss LOG TURNON SWLoss LOG TUNRNOFF SWLoss LOG TURNOFF Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the Turn Off Loss for a switching loss measurement specified by the SWLoss LOG INDEX command NOTE The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss LOG IN DEX command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss AVErage N This indicates that insufficient measurements have been taken to generate a log report Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss LOG TUNROFF Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss LOG TUNROFF Might return 1 3477193192E 2 Related Commands SWLoss LOG INDEX SWLoss LOGCONDUCTION SWLoss LOG TURNON SWLoss LOG TOTAL TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 209 Command Descriptions SWLoss LOG TURNON Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the Turn On Loss for a switching loss measurement specified by the SWLoss LOG INDEX command NOTE The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss LOG IN DEX command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss AVErage N This indicates that insufficient measur
220. ressing the front panel RUN STOP button If ACQuire STOPAfter is set to SEQuence other signal events may also stop acquisition NOTE The best way to determine when a single sequence acquisition is complete is to use OPC rather than ACQuire STATE For more information on the OPC command refer to page 2 169 Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire STATE OFF ON RUN STOP lt NR1 gt ACQuire STATE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 49 Command Descriptions Arguments OFF STOP lt NR1 gt 0 stops acquisitions ON RUN lt NR1 gt 0 starts acquisition and display of waveforms If the command was issued in the middle of an acquisition sequence for instance averaging RUN restarts the sequence discarding any data accumulated before the STOP It also resets the number of acquisitions Examples ACQuire STATE RUN Starts acquisition of waveform data and resets the number of acquisitions count NUMAC q to zero ACQuire STATE Returns 0 or 1 depending on whether or not the acquisition system is running Related Commands OPC ACQuire STOPAfter 2 50 Tells the oscilloscope when to stop taking acquisitions Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire STOPAfter RUNSTop SEQuence ACQuire STOPAfter Arguments RUNSTop specifies that the run and stop states should be determined by pressing the front panel RUN STOP button or issuing the ACQuire STATE command T
221. riptions Group Miscellaneous Syntax UNLock ALL Arguments ALL specifies all front panel buttons TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Examples UNLock ALL Unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs so they can be used Related Commands LOCk VERBose Sets and queries the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query responses Keywords can be both headers and arguments This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk Group Miscellaneous Syntax VERBose OFF ON lt NR1 gt VERBose Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Verbose state true which returns full length keywords for applicable setting queries OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Verbose state false which returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries Examples VERBose ON Sets the Verbose state true VERBose Might return the value 1 showing that the Verbose state is true Related Commands HEADer LRN SET TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 241 Command Descriptions WAI Set Only WAI wait prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands or queries until all pending operations finish This command lets you synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program Refer to Synchronization Methods on page 3 10 for more information Unlike O
222. rivable from the CURSor HBArs UNIts and CURSor VBArs UNIts queries Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs SLOPE Examples CURSor VBArs SLOPE Might return 1 22E3 indicating the slope measured between Vertical Cursor 1 and Vertical Cursor 2 CURSor VBArs UNIts 2 82 Sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors NOTE When Trigger View is active CURSor VBArs UNIts generates event 221 Settings conflict Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs UNIts SECOnds HERtz CURSor VBArs UNIts Arguments SECOnds specifies units of time TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions HERtz specifies units of frequency reciprocal of time Examples CURSor VBArs UNIts SECONDS Sets the units for the vertical bar cursors to seconds CURSor VBArs UNIts Returns HERTZ when the vertical bar cursor units are Hertz CURSor VBArs VDELTa Query Only TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Returns the vertical amplitude difference between the two vertical bar cursors The units are specified by the CURSor HBArs UNits query Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs VDELTa Returns lt NR3 gt indicates the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursors Examples CURSor VBArs VDELTa Might return 1 064E 0 indicating that the vertical difference between the vertical bar cursor ticks is 1 064 units TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS
223. rogrammer Status and Events MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY Service Request Method GPIB and USB Only Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands Also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request Enable Register SRER using the SRE command When the operation is complete a Service Request is generated The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization looks like this Set up single sequence acquisition SELECT CH1 ON ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE 32 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PK2PK MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices The SRQ when it comes interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task Take peak to peak measurement on acquired data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 15 Status and Events This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other dev
224. roup Hard copy TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 121 Command Descriptions Syntax HARDCopy LAYout LANdscape PORTRait HARDCopy LAYout Arguments LANdscape specifies that the bottom of the hard copy is along the long side of the piece of paper PORTRait specifies that the bottom of the hard copy is along the short side of the piece of paper This is the standard format Examples HARDCopy LAYout Might return PORTRAIT as the page layout format of the hard copy output HARDCopy PORT 2 122 Selects where to send the hard copy data when the oscilloscope receives the next HARDCOPY STARt command This command is equivalent to setting the Port option in the UTILITY gt Options gt Hard Copy Setup menu NOTE The TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes provide PictBridge printer support through a USB Device port on the rear of the oscilloscope See the PictBridge commands on page 2 27 Group Hard copy Syntax HARDCopy PORT CENtronics RS232 GPIb USB HARDCopy PORT TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Arguments CENtronics specifies that the hard copy data is sent out the Centronics port RS232 specifies that the hard copy data is sent out the RS232 port If you set the port to RS232 and use it to transfer a BMP screen image format file to a PC or other computer observe the following precaution that the BMP file is a bin
225. rsonal computer Examples FILESystem FORMat A Formats the CompactFlash card or the USB flash drive FILESystem FREESpace Query Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Returns a numeric value in bytes of the memory space available on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only This command returns 0 zero when there is no memory device installed in the oscilloscope Group File system Syntax FILESystem FREESpace Examples FILESystem FREESpace Might return 6242501 2 112 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions FILESystem MKDir Set Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Creates a folder at the specified location on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Group File system Syntax FILESystem MKDir lt folder path gt Arguments lt folder path gt is a quoted string that defines the location and name of the folder to create If you do not specify a path to the folder the oscilloscope creates the folder in the current working directory The current directory refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query Folder names must follow the same rules as file names See page 2 20 Examples FILESystem MKDir A PROD TST 2ND RUN Creates a ne
226. s achieved by synchronizing the program so that the measurement command is not processed by the oscilloscope until the acquisition is complete Figure 3 8 shows the desired processing sequence ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Processing Time Figure 3 8 Processing sequence with synchronization Four commands can be used to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program WAI BUSY OPC and OPC The OPC query is the most simple Using the WAI Command You can force commands to execute sequentially by using the WAI command This command forces completion of the previous commands before processing new ones TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 11 Status and Events The same command sequence using the WAI command for synchronization follows Set up single sequence acquisition SELECT CH1 ON ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PK2PK MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement WAI Take peak to peak measurement on acquired data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Though WAI is one of the easiest ways to achieve synchronization it is also the most costly The processing time of the oscillosco
227. s referred to as 8 3 naming m Wild card characters are not valid characters in file or path names m Lists the Windows generated short file and folder names for long file or folder names created on PC Windows operating systems Hard Copy Commands 2 20 The hard copy commands let you control the format of hard copy output and the starting and stopping of hard copies Table 2 13 lists and describes Hard Copy commands NOTE TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes include PictBridge commands to provide additional control of the hard copy format Refer to page 2 27 for information on the PictBridge commands Table 2 13 Hard Copy commands Header Description HARDCopy Start or terminate hard copy HARDCopy BUTTON Set or query the hard copy button TDS2MEM TDS1000B function 1DS2000B and TPS2000 only or TDS1000B TDS20008 and TPS2000 set or query the PRINT button HARDCopy FORMat Set or query the hard copy output format TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Groups Table 2 13 Hard Copy commands Cont Header HARDCopy INKSaver TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS2000B Description Set or query the hard copy ink saver option and TPS2000 only HARDCopy LAYout Set or query the hard copy orientation HARDCopy PORT Set or query the hard copy port for Horizontal Commands output RS232 GPIB Centronics or USB Horizontal commands control the time bases of the osc
228. s with a question mark the command is a query The header may begin with a colon character if the command is concatenated with other commands the beginning colon is required The beginning colon can never be used with command headers beginning with a star lt Mnemonic gt A header subfunction Some command headers have only one mnemonic If a command header has multiple mnemonics they are always separated from each other by a colon character lt Argument gt lt Comma gt lt Space gt A quantity quality restriction or limit associated with the header Not all commands have an argument while other commands have multiple arguments Arguments are separated from the header by a lt Space gt Arguments are separated from each other by a lt Comma gt A single comma between arguments of multiple ar gument commands It may optionally have white space characters before and after the comma A white space character between command header and argument It may optionally consist of multiple white space characters TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 3 Command Syntax 2 4 Figure 2 1 shows the five command message elements Header Comma 4 SAVe WAVEform CH1 REFA ae Mnemonics Arguments Space Figure 2 1 Command message elements Commands Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or change one of its settings Commands have the struct
229. scilloscope automatically calculates the 50 measurement point NWIdth TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is the negative pulse width between the first falling edge and the next rising edge at the waveform 50 level Falling and rising edges must be displayed to measure The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 50 measurement point NONE disables the measurement specified by lt x gt Examples MEASUrement MEAS3 TYPe CRMS Specifies MEAS3 to calculate the true Root Mean Square value 2 166 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Query Only Returns the units for the oscilloscope measurement specified by MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Where lt x gt identifies the measurement 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series and 1 through 5 for the TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Returns lt QString gt returns V for volts s for seconds or Hz for Hertz or a null string if MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe is set to NONE For the TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series lt QString gt can also return the following A for amps VA for volt amps AA for amps amps VV for volts volts You can also use this command for undefined math waveforms Examples MEASUrement MEAS3 UNIts Mi
230. scriptions DATa Arguments INIT reinitializes the waveform data settings to their factory defaults Examples DATa INIT Reinitializes the waveform data settings to their factory defaults DESTINATION REFA TARGET ENCDG RIBINARY SOUrce CH1 START 1 STOP 2500 WIDTH 1 DATa Might return the following string DATA ENCDG RPBINARY DESTINATION REFA SOURCE REFB START 1 STOP 500 WIDTH 2 Related Commands CURVe WAVFrm DATa DESTination 2 86 Sets or queries the reference memory location for storing oscillo scope waveform data that is transferred into the oscilloscope by the CURVe command This command is identical to the DATa TARget command Group Waveform Syntax DATa DESTination REF lt x gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions DATa DESTination Arguments REF lt x gt is the reference memory location where the waveform will be stored Examples DATa DESTINATION REFA Stores incoming waveform data into reference memory REFA DATa DESTINATION Might return REFB as the waveform location that is currently selected Related Commands CURVe DATa ENCdg Sets or queries the format of the waveform data This command is equivalent to setting WFMPre ENCdg WFMPre BN_Fmt and WFMPre BYT_Or as shown in Table 2 29 on page 2 88 Setting the DATa ENCdg value causes the corresponding WFMPre values to update Setting the WFMPre value causes the corr
231. sing colon before ACQuire m CH1 COUPling DC BANDwidth ON invalid colon before BANDwidth m CH1 COUPling DC TRG invalid colon before a star command m HORizontal MAIn POSition 0 MAIn SCAle 1E 13 levels of mnemonics are different either remove the second occurrence of MAIn or put HORizontal in front of MAIN SCAle Message Terminators This manual uses the term lt EOM gt End of message to represent a message terminator GPIB End of Message EOM Terminators GPIB EOM terminators can be the END message EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte the ASCII code for line feed LF sent as the last data byte or both The oscilloscope always terminates messages with LF and EOI White space is allowed before the terminator for example CR LF is acceptable USB End of Message EOM Terminators The EOM bit must be set in the USB header of the last transfer of a command message See the USB Test and Measurement Class Specification USBTMC section 3 2 1 for details The oscilloscope terminates messages by setting the EOM bit in the USB header of the last transfer of a message to the host USBTMC Specification section 3 3 1 and by terminating messages with a LF White space is allowed before the terminator for example CR LF is acceptable TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Syntax RS 232 End of Message Terminators RS 232 EOM terminators can be a CR carriage return LF
232. sually voltage relative to ground absolute coordinate of a point can be calculated Yn YZEro YMUIty yn YOF ENV specifies that the oscilloscope transmit the waveform as minimum and maximum point pairs Peak detect waveforms use ENV format Peak Detect mode specifies a maximum of 1250 minimum maximum pairs with the time between pairs being 2 XINcr The magnitudes and times of ENV format waveform points can be calculated using the same formulas used for Y format as long as you recognize that the points consist of minimum maximum pairs where each pair was collected over a time period of 2 XINcr Thus the samples for n 0 a minimum and n 1 a maximum the first minimum maximum pair were collected over a time interval of width 2 XINcr that began at the time found by setting n to zero in the formula The next pair were collected over the interval that began at the time found by setting n to 2 in the formula and so on Examples WFMPre PT Fmt Y Sets the waveform data point format to Y WFMPre PT Fmt Returns either Y or ENV Related Commands CURVe ACQuire MODe 2 250 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions WFMPre PT_Off The set form this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 unless the DATA SOUrce waveform is not displayed in which case the query generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is included for compatibility wi
233. syntax shown is the data format that the oscilloscope returns in response to a query This format is also the preferred format when sending a command to the oscilloscope When you enter an incorrect numeric argument the oscilloscope automatically forces the numeric argument to a correct value Table 2 6 lists how the oscilloscope handles incorrect numeric arguments TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 11 Command Syntax 2 12 Table 2 6 Oscilloscope handling of incorrect numeric arguments Argument value Oscilloscope response Numeric argument is Sets the specified command to the lowest correct less than lowest correct value and executes the command value for that command Numeric argument is Sets the specified command to the highest correct greater than the highest value and executes the command correct value for that command Numeric value is be Rounds the entered value to the nearest correct tween two correct values value and executes the command Quoted String Arguments Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by single quotes or double quotes For example this is a quoted string Symbol Meaning lt QString gt Quoted string of ASCII text Follow these rules when you use quoted strings 1 A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7 bit ASCII character set Refer to A
234. t IMMed UNIts Might return s indicating that the unit for the immediate measurement is seconds TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 161 Command Descriptions MEASUrement IMMed VALue Query Only 2 162 Executes the immediate oscilloscope measurement specified by the MEASUrement IMMed TYPe command The measurement is taken on the source specified by the MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce command Immediate queries and commands are the preferred measurement method for programming To check whether the measurement was successful use the ESR query followed by the EVENT or ALLEv queries to read the Standard Event Status Register SESR NOTE If the channel specified by MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce is not currently displayed the oscilloscope generates event 2225 and returns 9 9E37 If Trigger View is active Scan mode is in effect or the display format is set to XY this query returns 9 9E37 and generates event 221 Settings conflict When math is FFT turned on and used as a measurement source attempting to query the measurement value returns 9 9e37 and raises error 2225 no waveform to measure Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed VALue Returns lt NR3 gt Examples MEASUrement IMMed VALue Might return 28 75E6 if you are measuring the frequency of a 28 75 MHz signal TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions MEASUrement I
235. t lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a reference waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 WFMPre lt wfm gt XUNit Same as WFMPre XUNit except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION WFMPre lt wfm gt XZEro Same as WFMPre XZEro except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a reference waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 WFMPre lt wfm gt YMUIt Same as WFMPre YMUIt except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION 2 262 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a reference waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 WFMPre lt wfm gt YOFf Same as WFMPre YOFf except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DES TINATION For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a reference waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 WFMPre lt wfm gt YUNit Same as WFMPre YUNit except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a referen
236. t are in the transmitted waveform record The number of points depends on DATa STARt DATa STOP and whether DATa SOUrce is YT or FFT NR_Pt is at most 2500 for YT and 1024 for FFT NR_Pt is always at least one When the DATa SOUrce is not displayed the oscilloscope will generate an error and return event code 2244 Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre lt wfm gt NR_Pt Examples WFMPre CH1 NR Pt Returns lt NR1 gt which is the number of data points If DATa WIDth is 2 then there are lt NR1 gt 2 bytes in the curve Related Commands DATa SOUrce DATa STARt DATa STOP WFMPre lt wfm gt PT_Fmt Same as WFMPre PT_Fmt except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a reference waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 WFMPre lt wfm gt PT_Off Same as WFMPre PT_Off except that lt wfm gt specifies the source destination waveform instead of DATa SOUrce and DATa DESTINATION For set commands if lt wfm gt is not a reference waveform the oscilloscope generates error 2241 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 261 Command Descriptions Otherwise the set form of this command is ignored WFMPre lt wfm gt WFid Query Only Same as WFMPre WFId except that lt wfm gt specifies the source waveform instead of DATa SOUrce WFMPre lt wfm gt XINcr Same as WFMPre XINcr except tha
237. t sets a specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER Thus each message is associated with a specific SESR bit In the message tables that follow the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title with exceptions noted with the error message text Table 3 3 shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report These have no associated SESR bit Table 3 3 No event messages Message No events to report queue empty No events to report new events pending ESR TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 17 Status and Events 3 18 Table 3 4 shows the error messages generated by improper command syntax Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in the Command Syntax section starting on page 2 1 Table 3 4 Command error messages CME bit 5 Code Message 100 Command error 102 Syntax error 103 Invalid separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 108 Parameter not allowed 110 Command header error 111 Header separator error 112 Program mnemonic too long 113 Undefined header 161 Invalid block data indefinite length blocks are not allowed over the RS 232 Table 3 5 lists the errors that are detected during execution of a command In these error messages you should read macro as alias Table 3 5 Execution error messages EXE bit 4 Code Message 200 Execution error
238. th other Tektronix oscilloscopes NOTE Use the WFMPre XINcr WFMPre XUNit and WFMPre XZEro queries to determine the trigger position Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre PT Off Arguments Arguments are ignored WFMPre WFld Query Only Returns a descriptive string from the waveform specified in the DATa SOUrce command if that waveform is active or displayed If that waveform is not active or displayed the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244 waveform requested is not active Group Waveform Syntax WFMPre WFId TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 251 Command Descriptions Examples WFMPre WFId For a YT waveform this might return WFMPRE WFID Chl DC coupling 1 0E0 V div 5 0E 4 s div 2500 points Sample mode For a Math waveform this might return WFMPRE WFID Math DC coupling 1 0E0 V div 5 0E 4 s div 2500 points Sample mode For an FFT spectrum TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TDS2000 series only this might return WFMPRE WFID Math DC coupling 1 0E1 dB div 2 52525253E4 Hz div 1024 points Sample mode WFMPre XINcr 2 252 The set form of this command specifies the interval seconds per point for non FFT Hertz per point for FFT between samples of the reference waveform specified by the DATa DESTination command The oscilloscope uses this value to c
239. the DATa WIDth command to specify the number of bytes per data point 4 Use the DATa STARt command to specify the first data point in the waveform record 5 Use the WFMPRe command to transfer waveform preamble information 6 Use the CURVe command to transfer waveform data 2 44 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Commands either set or query oscilloscope values Some commands both set and query some only set and some only query Manual Conventions This manual uses the following conventions No query form exists for commands identified as Set Only A question mark appended to the command and Query Only indicates query only commands Fully spells out headers mnemonics and arguments with the minimal spelling shown in upper case for example to use the abbreviated form of the ACQuire MODe command just type ACQ MOD Syntax of some commands varies depending on the model of oscilloscope and extension module you use differences are noted Command descriptions list specific oscilloscopes series and module when commands are valid for only those products NOTE While Trigger View is active when you push the TRIG VIEW button on the front panel the oscilloscope ignores the set form of most commands If you send a command at this time the oscilloscope generates execution error 221 Settings conflict ACQuire Query Only Returns current acquisiti
240. the Source option in the Trigger menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn PULse SOUrce CH lt x gt EXT EXT5 EXT10 TRIGger MAIn PULse SOUrce Arguments CH lt x gt specifies one of the allowable input channels The value of lt x gt can be 1 through 4 on four channel oscilloscopes or 1 or 2 on two channel oscilloscopes EXT specifies the external input not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes EXT5 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 5 not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes EXT10 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 10 TPS2000 series only TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth Query Only TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Returns the pulse trigger width settings Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth Examples TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth Might return the following string TRIGGER MAIN PULSE WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN EQUAL WIDTH 1 0E 3 TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth POLarity TDS1000 TDS2000 TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only Sets or queries the polarity for the pulse trigger This is equivalent to setting the Polarity option in the Pulse Trigger menu Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth POLarity POSITIVe NEGAtive TRIGger MAIn PULse WIDth POLarity TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Progra
241. the display format set to XY this query generates event 221 Settings conflict and returns 9 9E37 NOTE When math is FFT turned on and used as a measurement source attempting to query the measurement value returns 9 9e37 and raises error 2225 no waveform to measure TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Returns lt NR3 gt Examples MEASUrement MEAS3 VALue Might return 28 75E6 if measurement number three is frequency OPC The OPC query and the OPC set command provide two different methods for checking for the completion of the commands listed in Table 2 30 on page 2 170 such as single sequence acquisitions The OPC query uses a more simple method than the OPC set command The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 into the output queue when all pending operations listed in Table 2 30 are complete If none of the operations are pending the OPC query immediately places a 1 in the output queue NOTE When using the OPC query method the time out on your controller must be set for longer than the operation for which the controller is waiting such as a single sequence acquisition Unlike the OPC command the OPC query does not affect the OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Status Register ESR The OPC set command uses a more complex method than the OPC query Howeve
242. tput Queue When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the RQS bit When you use the STB query to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the MSS bit Reading the SBR does not clear the bits Figure 3 2 shows the SBR bit functions 6 7 RQS 5 4 3 2 1 0 le ESB MV MSS Figure 3 2 The Status Byte Register SBR Table 3 2 lists and describes SBR bit functions TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 3 Status and Events 3 4 Table 3 2 SBR bit functions Bit Function 7 MSB Not used 6 RQS Request Service obtained from a serial poll Shows that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller or USB host 6 MSS Master Status Summary obtained from STB Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR 5 ESB Event Status Bit Shows that status is enabled and present in the SESR 4 MAV Message Available Shows that output is available in the Output Queue 3 0 Not used Enable Registers The DESER ESER and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue and can prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls In order for an event to be reporte
243. ts NOTE If the units are Watts the trigger type must be Edge and the trigger source must be a channel specified by SWLoss SOURCES SWLoss VALue CONDUCTION Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is conducting in its on state You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the SWLoss VSAT command This command returns an immediate measurement value that does not depend of the current oscilloscope menu Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss VALue CONDUCTION Returns lt NR3 gt TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 217 Command Descriptions Returns SWLoss VALue CONDUCTION Might return 6 0166666667E 2 SWLoss VALue TOTAL Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only Returns the sum of the Turn On Turn Off and Conduction switching losses This command returns an immediate measurement value that does not depend of the current oscilloscope menu Group Power Measurement Syntax SWLoss VALue TOTAL Returns lt NR3 gt Examples SWLoss VALue TOTAL Might return SWLoss VALue TURNOFF Query Only TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only 2 218 Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning between its on and off state You must enter the saturation voltage of the device u
244. tting the function to anything other than OFF causes the Cursor menu to be displayed NOTE Setting the display format to XY removes the cursors Sending the CURSor FUNCtion command when the display format is XY causes the oscilloscope to generate event 221 Settings conflict and leaves the display in XY format Group Cursor Syntax CURSor FUNCtion HBArs OFF VBArs CURSor FUNCtion Arguments HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors that measure the vertical units in volts amps divisions or decibels OFF removes cursors from the display VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors that measure time or frequency TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 73 Command Descriptions Examples CURSor FUNCtion VBArs Selects vertical bar type cursors CURSor HBArs Query Only Returns the current settings for the oscilloscope horizontal bar cursors Group Cursor Syntax CURSor HBArs Returns Current horizontal bar cursor settings Examples CURSor HBArs Might return the following string CURSOR HBARS UNITS VOLTS POSITION1 0 0E0 POSITION2 0 0E0 CURSor HBArs DELTa Query Only 2 74 Returns the difference in vertical units between the two horizontal bar cursors in the oscilloscope display NOTE If Trigger View is active this query returns 9 9E37 and generates event 221 Settings conflict Group Cursor TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programme
245. up RS 232 Syntax RS232 PARity EVEN ODD NONe RS232 PARity Arguments EVEN sets even parity ODD sets odd parity NONe sets no parity no ninth bit transmitted TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 187 Command Descriptions Examples RS232 PARity EVEN Sets even parity RS232 SOFTFlagging TDS200 TDS1000 TDS2000 and TPS2000 Series Only 2 188 Sets or queries the input and output soft flagging over the RS 232C port After receiving an XOFF DC3 the oscilloscope sends two or less characters The oscilloscope begins transmitting data again when it receives an XON DC1 character The oscilloscope sends an XOFF character when its input buffer is running out of space After sending an XOFF character it can receive at least 20 more bytes It sends XON when its input buffer has an acceptable number of free bytes When soft flagging is enabled and binary data is transferred data transmission will lock up if the data contains XOFF or XON characters Hard flagging and soft flagging cannot be active at the same time However hard and soft flagging can both be inactive at the same time Activating soft flagging deactivates hard flagging Activating hard flagging deactivates soft flagging Group RS 232 Syntax RS232 SOFTFlagging ON OFF lt NR1 gt RS232 SOFTF lagging Arguments ON or NR1 0 activates soft flagging and deactivates hard flagging OFF or NR1 0 deactivat
246. ure lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Comma gt lt Argument gt A command header is made up of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical or tree structure The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off of the previous one Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level The leading colon always returns you to the base of the command tree Queries Queries cause the oscilloscope to return information about its status or settings Queries have the structure lt Header gt lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Comma gt lt Argument gt You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Syntax For example MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts returns the measure ment units while MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe returns the measurement type selected for the measurement and MEASUre ment MEAS lt x gt returns all the measurement parameters for the specified measurement Headers in Query Responses You can control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as part of the query response Use the HEADer command to control this feature If header is on the oscilloscope returns command head
247. ust use ESR to read the summary of the event from the SESR This makes the events summarized by ESR available to EVENT and EVMSG and empties the SESR Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous ESR reads but not read from the Event Queue Events that follow an ESR read are put in the Event Queue but are not available until ESR is used again TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 3 7 Status and Events Event Handling Sequence 3 8 In this description the numbers in parentheses map to the corre sponding numbers in Figure 3 6 When an event occurs a signal is sent to the DESER 1 If that type of event is enabled in the DESER that is if the bit for that event type is set to 1 the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one and the event is recorded in the Event Queue 2 If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled 3 then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one 4 When output is sent to the Output Queue the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one 5 When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled 6 the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request GPIB and USB only is generated 7 Figure 3 6 shows how to use the status and event handling system TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events a Event Event Event Queue Event G Device Event Status Ena
248. utput Queue stores query responses waiting to be output The oscilloscope empties the Output Queue each time it receives a new command or query message This means you must read any query response before you send the next command or query or you will lose responses to earlier queries Also an error may result 3 6 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events NOTE When a controller sends a query an lt EOM gt and a second query the digitizing oscilloscope normally clears the first response and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error QYE bit in the ESER to indicate the lost response A fast controller however may receive a part or all of the first response as well To avoid this situation the controller should always read the response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL Device Clear before sending the second query The Event Queue The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 20 events If more than 20 events stack up in the Event Queue the 20th event is replaced by event code 350 Too many events Read the Event Queue with EVENT which returns only the event number with EVMsg which returns the event number and a text description of the event or with ALLEV which returns all the event numbers along with a description of the event Reading an event removes it from the queue Before reading an event from the Event Queue you m
249. w folder 2ND RUN in the existing folder A PROD TST FILESystem MKDir VID EVAL Creates a new folder VID EVAL in the current working folder Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem RMDir TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 113 Command Descriptions FILESystem REName Set Only TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 Series Only 2 114 Assigns a new name to a file or folder on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only You can also move a file or folder by specifying the new name in a different folder Group File system Syntax FILESystem REName lt old filepath gt lt new filepath gt Arguments lt old filepath gt is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the file to rename If you do not specify a path to the file the oscilloscope looks for the file in the current working folder The current directory refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem CWD query lt new filepath gt is a quoted string that defines the path and new name of the file If you do not specify a path to a folder the oscilloscope places the renamed file into the current working folder See page 2 20 for file naming rules Examples FILESystem REName VID CH1 BMP VID EVAL BMP Renames the file VID CH1 BMP to VID EVAL BMP in the current working folder FILESystem REName VID EVAL BMP A PROD TST VID EVAL
250. waveform 2211 Measurement error No backwards Mid Ref crossing 2212 Measurement error No negative crossing 2213 Measurement error No positive crossing 2214 Measurement error No crossing 2215 Measurement error No crossing second waveform 2216 Measurement error No crossing target waveform 2217 Measurement error Constant waveform 2218 Measurement error Unused 2219 Measurement error No valid edge No arm sample 2220 Measurement error No valid edge No arm cross 2221 Measurement error No valid edge No trigger cross 2222 Measurement error No valid edge No second cross 2223 Measurement error waveform mismatch 2224 Measurement error WAIT calculating 3 20 TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution error messages EXE bit 4 Cont Code 2225 Message Measurement error No waveform to measure 2226 Null Waveform 2227 2228 Positive and Negative Clipping Measurement error Positive Clipping 2229 2230 Measurement error Negative Clipping Measurement error High Ref lt Low Ref 2235 2241 Math error Invalid math description Waveform request is invalid 2242 2243 Data start gt record length Waveform requested is not a data source 2244 2245 2246 Waveform requested is not turned on Saveref error Selected channel is turned off Saveref error Selected channel data invalid 2248 2260 2301 2302 2303
251. works equally well ACQuire MODe AVErage ACQuire NUMAVg 16 m Never precede a star command with a colon or semicolon ACQuire MODe AVErage TRG The oscilloscope processes commands that follow the star command as if the star command was not there so ACQuire MODe AVErage TRG NUMAVg 16 sets the acquisition mode to average and sets acquisition averaging to 16 The TRG command is ignored m When you concatenate queries the responses to all queries are combined into a single response message For example if channel 1 coupling is set to DC and the bandwidth is set to 20 MHz the concatenated query CH1 COUP1ing BANdwidth returns CH1 COUPLING DC CH1 BANDWIDTH ON if header is on or DC ON if header is off m You can concatenate set commands and queries in the same message For example ACQuire MODe AVErage NUMAVg STATE is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to average queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and then queries the acquisition state The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands and queries in the order it receives them TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer 2 7 Command Syntax 2 8 m Any query that returns arbitrary data such as ID must be the last query when part of a concatenated command If the query is not last the oscilloscope generates event message 440 Here are some INVALID concatenation examples m CH1 COUPling DC ACQuire NUMAVg 16 mis
252. y TDS200 TDS1000 2000 TDS1000B 2000B TPS2000 Programmer Command Descriptions Related Commands RECAIL SETUp RCL SAV SAVe WAVEform Set Only Stores a waveform in one of the nonvolatile reference memory locations or to a file on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only This command is equivalent to selecting the Save Waveform option in the Save Recall Waveform menu Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe WAVEform lt wfm gt REF lt x gt lt file path gt Arguments lt wfm gt is CH lt y gt one of the allowable channels or MATH This is the waveform that will be saved For TDS2MEM module and TPS2000 series lt wfm gt can also be a reference waveform location for example REF4 if the destination is lt file path gt REF lt x gt is one of the allowable reference waveform storage locations lt file path gt TDS2MEM TDS1000B TDS2000B and TPS2000 series only is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the waveform file to save on the CompactFlash card TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only or on the USB flash drive TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only Use the extension CSV for saved waveform files Waveform data is saved as self documented comma separated ASCII values If you do not specify a path to a folder the TDS2MEM creates the waveform file in the current working folder The current folder refers to the name of a

Programmer Manual TDS200, TDS1000/TDS2000

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents